US20060058287A1 - Compounds - Google Patents

Compounds Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20060058287A1
US20060058287A1 US10/518,655 US51865505A US2006058287A1 US 20060058287 A1 US20060058287 A1 US 20060058287A1 US 51865505 A US51865505 A US 51865505A US 2006058287 A1 US2006058287 A1 US 2006058287A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
alkyl
hydroxy
optionally substituted
amino
alkenyl
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Granted
Application number
US10/518,655
Other versions
US7498326B2 (en
Inventor
Jeffrey Axten
Robert Daines
David Davies
Timothy Gallagher
Graham Jones
William Miller
Neil Pearson
Israil Pendrak
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Glaxo Group Ltd
Original Assignee
Glaxo Group Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Glaxo Group Ltd filed Critical Glaxo Group Ltd
Priority to US10/518,655 priority Critical patent/US7498326B2/en
Assigned to GLAXO GROUP LIMITED reassignment GLAXO GROUP LIMITED ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: AXTEN, JEFFREY M., DAINES, ROBERT A., PEARSON, NEIL D., PENDRAK, ISRAIL, DAVIES, DAVID T., GALLAGHER, TIMOTHY F., JONES, GRAHAM E., MILLER, WILLIAM H.
Publication of US20060058287A1 publication Critical patent/US20060058287A1/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of US7498326B2 publication Critical patent/US7498326B2/en
Adjusted expiration legal-status Critical
Expired - Fee Related legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D491/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed ring system both one or more rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms and one or more rings having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D459/00, C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D489/00
    • C07D491/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed ring system both one or more rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms and one or more rings having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D459/00, C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D489/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D491/04—Ortho-condensed systems
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/02—Halogenated hydrocarbons
    • A61K31/025—Halogenated hydrocarbons carbocyclic
    • A61K31/03—Halogenated hydrocarbons carbocyclic aromatic
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/535—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with at least one nitrogen and one oxygen as the ring hetero atoms, e.g. 1,2-oxazines
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/54—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with at least one nitrogen and one sulfur as the ring hetero atoms, e.g. sulthiame
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/04—Antibacterial agents
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D513/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed system at least one hetero ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for in groups C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D499/00 - C07D507/00
    • C07D513/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed system at least one hetero ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for in groups C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D499/00 - C07D507/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D513/04—Ortho-condensed systems

Definitions

  • This invention relates to novel compounds, compositions containing them and their use as antibacterials.
  • WO99/37635 discloses cyclohexane, piperidine and piperazine derivatives having antibacterial activity.
  • This invention provides a compound of formula (1) or a pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof: wherein:
  • This invention also provides a method of treatment of bacterial infections in mammals, particularly in man, which method comprises the administration to a mammal in need of such treatment an effective amount of a compound of formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof.
  • the invention also provides the use of a compound of formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof, in the manufacture of a medicament for use in the treatment of bacterial infections in mammals.
  • the invention also provides a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • R A is not indole or benzofuran.
  • Z 2 is three atoms long.
  • Z 4 and Z 5 are both carbon.
  • Z 1 is three atoms long with carbon joined to Z 3 and with R 1 on the carbon atom joined to Z 3 .
  • R A is aromatic and ring (y) is fused benzene.
  • (x) is 6-membered containing one or two nitrogen atoms, the remainder being carbon.
  • Z 3 is nitrogen and the remainder are carbon or Z 1 is ⁇ CH—CH ⁇ N— (N attached to Z 5 ).
  • ring (y) is fused pyridin-4-yl (Z 2 is three atoms long, the atom attached to Z 5 in Z 2 is nitrogen and the remainder and Z 4 and Z 5 are carbon), Z 1 is two or three atoms long and Z 3 is a heteroatom such as O or S.
  • rings R A include optionally substituted isoquinolin-5-yl, quinolin-8-yl, thieno[3,2-b]pyridin-7-yl, 2,3-dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-b]pyridin-8-yl, quinoxalin-5-yl, isoquinolin-8-yl, [1,6]-naphthyridin-4-yl, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydroquinoxalin-5-yl and 1,2-dihydroisoquinoline-8-yl. Most preferably R A is optionally 2-substituted-quinolin-8-yl or optionally 3-substituted-quinoxalin-5-yl.
  • R 13 in rings (x) and (y) is preferably H or (C 1-6 )alkyl.
  • R 1 or R 1a is substituted alkoxy it is preferably (C 2-6 )alkoxy substituted by optionally N-substituted amino, or (C 1-6 )alkoxy substituted by piperidyl.
  • Suitable examples of R 1 and R 1a alkoxy include methoxy, trifluoromethoxy, n-propyloxy, iso-butyloxy, aminoethyloxy, aminopropyloxy, aminobutyloxy, aminopentyloxy, guanidinopropyloxy, piperidin-4-ylmethyloxy or 2-aminocarbonylprop-2-oxy.
  • R 1 and R 1a are independently hydrogen, (C 1-4 )alkoxy, (C 1-4 )alkylthio, (C 1-4 )alkyl, amino(C 3-5 )alkyloxy, nitro, cyano, carboxy, hydroxymethyl or halogen; more preferably hydrogen, methoxy, methyl, cyano, halogen or amino(C 3-5 )alkyloxy.
  • Ring R A is preferably substituted by one group R 1 .
  • R 1 is H, methoxy, methyl, cyano or halogen and R 1a is H.
  • Halogen is preferably chloro or fluoro.
  • n 0.
  • R 2 is preferably hydrogen; (C 1-4 )alkyl substituted with carboxy, optionally substituted hydroxy, optionally substituted aminocarbonyl, optionally substituted amino or (C 1-4 )alkoxycarbonyl; or (C 2-4 )alkenyl substituted with (C 1-4 )alkoxycarbonyl or carboxy. More preferred groups for R 2 are hydrogen, carboxymethyl, hydroxyethyl, aminocarbonylmethyl, ethoxycarbonylmethyl, ethoxycarbonylalkyl and carboxyalkyl, most preferably hydrogen.
  • R 3 include hydrogen; optionally substituted hydroxy; optionally substituted amino; halogen; (C 1-4 )alkoxycarbonyl; (C 1-4 ) alkyl; ethenyl; optionally substituted 1-hydroxy-(C 1-4 ) alkyl; optionally substituted aminocarbonyl; carboxy(C 1-4 )alkyl; optionally substituted aminocarbonyl(C 1-4 )alkyl; cyano(C 1-4 )alkyl; optionally substituted 2-oxo-oxazolidinyl and optionally substituted 2-oxo-oxazolidinyl(C 1-4 alkyl). More preferred R 3 groups are hydrogen; CONH 2 ; 1-hydroxyalkyl e.g.
  • R 3 is hydrogen, hydroxy or fluoro.
  • R 3 is preferably in the 3- or 4-position.
  • R 3 When R 3 is in the 3-position, preferably it is trans to (NR 2 )R 4 and has R stereochemistry or is cis to NR 2 R 4 and has S stereochemistry.
  • R 3 and R 6 , R 7 , R 8 or R 9 together form a cyclic ester or amide linkage, it is preferred that the resulting ring is 5-7 membered. It is further preferred that the group A or B which does not form the ester or amide linkage is CH 2 .
  • n 0.
  • CR 6 R 7 is CH 2 , CHOH, CH(NH 2 ), C(Me)(OH) or CH(Me) and CR 8 R 9 is CH 2 .
  • A is NH, NCH 3 , CH 2 , CHOH, CH(NH 2 ), C(Me)(OH) or CH(Me).
  • B is CH 2 or CO.
  • A-B is CH 2 —CH 2 , CHOH—CH 2 , NR 11 —CH 2 or NR 11 —CO.
  • Particularly preferred are those compounds where n 0, A and B are both CH 2 , A is NH and B is CO, or A is CHOH and B is CH 2 , when more preferably A is the R-isomer of CHOH.
  • R 11 is hydrogen or (C 1-4 )alkyl e.g. methyl, more preferably hydrogen.
  • U is most preferably CH 2 .
  • R 5 is an aromatic heterocyclic ring (A) having 8-11 ring atoms including 2-4 heteroatoms of which at least one is N or NR 13 in which preferably Y 2 contains 2-3 heteroatoms, one of which is S and 1-2 are N, with one N bonded to X 3 .
  • the heterocyclic ring (A) has ring (a) aromatic selected from optionally substituted benzo and pyrido and ring (b) non aromatic and Y 2 has 3-5 atoms, more preferably 4 atoms, including a heteroatom bonded to X 5 selected from O, S or NR 3 , where R 13 is other than hydrogen, and NHCO bonded via N to X 3 , or O bonded to X 3 .
  • the ring (a) preferably contains aromatic nitrogen, and more preferably ring (a) is pyridine. Examples of rings (A) include optionally substituted:
  • R 13 is preferably H if in ring (a) or in addition (C 1-4 )alkyl such as methyl or isopropyl when in ring (b). More preferably, in ring (b) R 13 is H when NR 13 is bonded to X 3 and (C 1-4 )alkyl when NR 13 is bonded to X 5 .
  • R 14 and R 15 are preferably independently selected from hydrogen, halo, hydroxy, (C 1-4 ) alkyl, (C 1-4 )alkoxy, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, cyano, aryl(C 1-4 )alkoxy and (C 1-4 )alkylsulphonyl. More preferably R 15 is hydrogen.
  • each R 14 is selected from hydrogen, chloro, fluoro, hydroxy, methyl, methoxy, trifluoromethoxy, benzyloxy, nitro, cyano and methylsulphonyl. Most preferably R 14 is selected from hydrogen, fluorine or nitro.
  • R 14 and R 15 are each H.
  • R 5 include:
  • alkyl includes groups having straight and branched chains, for instance, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl, sec-butyl, t-butyl, pentyl and hexyl.
  • alkenyl should be interpreted accordingly.
  • Halo or halogen includes fluoro, chloro, bromo and iodo.
  • Haloalkyl moieties include 1-3 halogen atoms.
  • heterocyclic as used herein includes optionally substituted aromatic and non-aromatic, single and fused, rings suitably containing up to four hetero-atoms in each ring selected from oxygen, nitrogen and sulphur, which rings may be unsubstituted or C-substituted by, for example, up to three groups selected from (C 1-4 )alkylthio; halo; carboxy(C 1-4 )alkyl; halo(C 1-4 )alkoxy; halo(C 1-4 )alkyl; (C 1-4 )alkyl; (C 2-4 )alkenyl; (C 1-4 )alkoxycarbonyl; formyl; (C 1-4 )alkylcarbonyl; (C 2-4 )alkenyloxycarbonyl; (C 2-4 )alkenylcarbonyl; (C 1-4 )alkylcarbonyloxy; (C 1-4 )alkoxycarbonyl(C 1-4 )alkoxycarbonyl(
  • Each heterocyclic ring suitably has from 4 to 7, preferably 5 or 6, ring atoms.
  • a fused heterocyclic ring system may include carbocyclic rings and need include only one heterocyclic ring.
  • suitable optional substituents in such substituted amino groups include H; trifluoromethyl; (C 1-4 )alkyl optionally substituted by hydroxy, (C 1-6 )alkoxy, (C 1-6 )alkylthio, halo or trifluoromethyl; (C 2-4 )alkenyl; aryl; aryl (C 1-4 )alkyl; (C 1-4 )alkoxycarbonyl; (C 1-4 )alkylcarbonyl; formyl; (C 1-6 )alkylsulphonyl; or aminocarbonyl wherein the amino group is optionally substituted by (C 1-4 )alkoxycarbonyl, (C 1-4 )alkylcarbonyl, (C 2-4 )alkenyloxycarbonyl, (C 2-4 )alkenylcarbonyl, (C 1-4 )alkyl or (C 2-4 )
  • aryl includes optionally substituted phenyl and naphthyl.
  • Aryl groups may be optionally substituted with up to five, preferably up to three, groups selected from (C 1-4 )alkylthio; halo; carboxy(C 1-4 )alkyl; halo(C 1-4 )alkoxy; halo(C 1-4 )alkyl; (C 1-4 )alkyl; (C 2-4 )alkenyl; (C 1-4 )alkoxycarbonyl; formyl; (C 1-4 )alkylcarbonyl; (C 2-4 )alkenyloxycarbonyl; (C 2-4 )alkenylcarbonyl; (C 1-4 )alkylcarbonyloxy; (C 1-4 )alkoxycarbonyl(C 1-4 )alkyl; hydroxy; hydroxy(C 1-4 )alkyl; mercapto(C 1-4 )alkyl; (C 1-4 )alkoxy; nitro; cyano; carboxy; amino or aminocarbonyl optionally substituted as for
  • acyl includes formyl and (C 1-6 )alkylcarbonyl group.
  • Some of the compounds of this invention may be crystallised or recrystallised from solvents such as aqueous and organic solvents. In such cases solvates may be formed.
  • This invention includes within its scope stoichiometric solvates including hydrates as well as compounds containing variable amounts of water that may be produced by processes such as lyophilisation.
  • the compounds of formula (I) are intended for use in pharmaceutical compositions it will readily be understood that they are each preferably provided in substantially pure form, for example at least 60% pure, more suitably at least 75% pure and preferably at least 85%, especially at least 98% pure (% are on a weight for weight basis). Impure preparations of the compounds may be used for preparing the more pure forms used in the pharmaceutical compositions; these less pure preparations of the compounds should contain at least 1%, more suitably at least 5% and preferably from 10 to 59% of a compound of the formula (I) or pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof.
  • Particular compounds according to the invention include those mentioned in the examples and their pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives.
  • compositions of the above-mentioned compounds of formula (I) include the free base form or their acid addition or quaternary ammonium salts, for example their salts with mineral acids e.g. hydrochloric, hydrobromic, sulphuric nitric or phosphoric acids, or organic acids, e.g. acetic, fumaric, succinic, maleic, citric, benzoic, p-toluenesulphonic, methanesulphonic, naphthalenesulphonic acid or tartaric acids.
  • Compounds of formula (I) may also be prepared as the N-oxide.
  • Compounds of formula (I) having a free carboxy group may also be prepared as an in vivo hydrolysable ester. The invention extends to all such derivatives.
  • Suitable pharmaceutically acceptable in vivo hydrolysable ester-forming groups include those forming esters which break down readily in the human body to leave the parent acid or its salt. Suitable groups of this type include those of part formulae (i), (ii), (iii), (iv) and (v):
  • R a is hydrogen, (C 1-6 ) alkyl, (C 3-7 ) cycloalkyl, methyl, or phenyl
  • R b is (C 1-6 ) alkyl, (C 1-6 ) alkoxy, phenyl, benzyl, (C 3-7 ) cycloalkyl, (C 3-7 ) cycloalkyloxy, (C 1-6 ) alkyl (C 3-7 ) cycloalkyl, 1-amino (C 1-6 ) alkyl, or 1-(C 1-6 alkyl)amino (C 1-6 ) alkyl; or R a and R b together form a 1,2-phenylene group optionally substituted by one or two methoxy groups; R c represents (C 1-6 ) alkylene optionally substituted with a methyl or ethyl group and R d and R e independently represent (C 1-6 ) alkyl; R f represents (C 1-6 ) alkyl; R
  • Suitable in vivo hydrolysable ester groups include, for example, acyloxy(C 1-6 )alkyl groups such as acetoxymethyl, pivaloyloxymethyl, ⁇ -acetoxyethyl, ⁇ -pivaloyloxyethyl, 1-(cyclohexylcarbonyloxy)prop-1-yl, and (1-aminoethyl)carbonyloxymethyl; (C 1-6 )alkoxycarbonyloxy(C 1-6 )alkyl groups, such as ethoxycarbonyloxymethyl, ⁇ -ethoxycarbonyloxyethyl and propoxycarbonyloxyethyl; di(C 1-6 )alkylamino(C 1-6 )alkyl especially di(C 1-4 )alkylamino(C 1-4 )alkyl groups such as dimethylaminomethyl, dimethylaminoethyl, diethylaminomethyl or diethylaminoethyl;
  • a further suitable pharmaceutically acceptable in vivo hydrolysable ester-forming group is that of the formula:
  • R k is hydrogen, C 1-6 alkyl or phenyl.
  • R is preferably hydrogen.
  • Certain of the compounds of formula (I) may exist in the form of optical isomers, e.g. diastereoisomers and mixtures of isomers in all ratios, e.g. racemic mixtures.
  • the invention includes all such forms, in particular the pure isomeric forms.
  • the invention includes compound in which an A-B group CH(OH)—CH 2 is in either isomeric configuration, the R-isomer is preferred.
  • the different isomeric forms may be separated or resolved one from the other by conventional methods, or any given isomer may be obtained by conventional synthetic methods or by stereospecific or asymmetric syntheses.
  • a process for preparing compounds of formula (I), and pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof comprises reacting a compound of formula (IV) with a compound of formula (V): wherein n is as defined in formula (1); Z 1′ , Z 2′ , Z 3′ , R 1′ , and R 3′ are Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , R 1 , and R 3 as defined in formula (1) or groups convertible thereto; Z 4 and Z 5 are as defined in formula (I);
  • Process variant (i) initially produces compounds of formula (I) wherein A-B is A′-CO.
  • Process variant (ii) initially produces compounds of formula (I) wherein A-B is CHR 6 —CR 8 R 9 .
  • Process variant (iii) initially produces compounds of formula (I) wherein A-B is CR 6 (OH)—CR 8 R 9 .
  • Process variant (iv) initially produces compounds of formula (I) where A-B is NH—CO.
  • Process variant (v) initially produces compounds of formula (I) wherein A-B is CO—CH 2 or CH 2 —CO.
  • Process variant (vi) initially produces compounds of formula (I) wherein A-B is CR 6 R 7 —CR 9 OH.
  • Process variant (vii) and (viii) initially produce compounds of formula (I) wherein A-B is CR 7 ⁇ CR 9 .
  • Process variant (ix) initially produces compounds of formula (I) where A-B is CO—NR 11 or NR 11 —CO.
  • Process variant (x) initially produces compounds of formula (I) wherein A-B is NR 11 —CHR 8 .
  • Process variant (xi) initially produces compounds of formula (I) wherein A-B is NR 11 —CR 8 R 9 .
  • Process variant (xiii) initially produces compounds of formula (I) where A-B is CR 6 R 7 —SO 2 .
  • Process variant (xiv) initially produces compounds of formula (I) wherein A-B is O—CH 2 .
  • Process variant (xv) initially produces compounds where AB is NR 11 SO 2 .
  • Process variant (xvi) initially produces compounds of formula (I) where A-B is NR 11′ —CO.
  • Process variants (xvii) and (xviii) initially produce compounds of formula (I) where A-B is —CH 2 —CH 2 —.
  • reaction is a standard amide or urea formation reaction involving e.g.:
  • A′ may be, for example, protected hydroxymethylene.
  • the process variant (ii) is a standard addition reaction using methods well known to those skilled in the art.
  • the process is preferably carried out in a polar organic solvent e.g. acetonitrile in the presence of an organic base e.g. triethylamine.
  • the coupling may be effected in a suitable solvent such as acetonitrile or dimethylformamide at room temperature in the presence of one equivalent of lithium perchlorate as catalyst (general method of J. E. Chateauneuf et al, J. Org. Chem., 56, 5939-5942, 1991) or more preferably with ytterbium triflate in dichloromethane.
  • a suitable solvent such as acetonitrile or dimethylformamide
  • one equivalent of lithium perchlorate as catalyst generally known method of J. E. Chateauneuf et al, J. Org. Chem., 56, 5939-5942, 1991
  • ytterbium triflate in dichloromethane.
  • an elevated temperature such as 40-70° C. may be beneficial.
  • the piperidine may be treated with a base, such as one equivalent of butyl lithium, and the resulting salt reacted with the oxirane in an inert solvent such as tetrahydrofuran, preferably at an elevated temperature such as 80° C.
  • a base such as one equivalent of butyl lithium
  • an inert solvent such as tetrahydrofuran
  • the process variant (iv) is a standard urea formation reaction from the reaction of an isocyanate with an amine and is conducted by methods well known to those skilled in the art (for example see March, J; Advanced Organic Chemistry, Edition 3 (John Wiley and Sons, 1985), p 802-3).
  • the process is preferably carried out in a polar solvent such as N,N-dimethylformamide.
  • the process is two step: firstly a condensation using a base, preferably sodium hydride or alkoxide, sodamide, alkyl lithium or lithium dialkylamide, preferably in an aprotic solvent e.g. ether, THF or benzene; secondly, hydrolysis using an inorganic acid, preferably HCl in aqueous organic solvent at 0-100° C.
  • a base preferably sodium hydride or alkoxide, sodamide, alkyl lithium or lithium dialkylamide, preferably in an aprotic solvent e.g. ether, THF or benzene
  • hydrolysis using an inorganic acid preferably HCl in aqueous organic solvent at 0-100° C.
  • the reaction is carried out in the presence of a base, preferably organometallic or metal hydride e.g. NaH, lithium diisopropylamide or NaOEt, preferably in an aprotic solvent, preferably THF, ether or benzene at ⁇ 78 to 25° C. (analogous process in Gutswiller et al. (1978) J. Am. Chem. Soc. 100, 576).
  • a base preferably organometallic or metal hydride e.g. NaH, lithium diisopropylamide or NaOEt
  • an aprotic solvent preferably THF, ether or benzene
  • a base is preferably NaH, KH, an alkyl lithium e.g. BuLi, a metal alkoxide e.g. NaOEt, sodamide or lithium dialkylamide e.g. di-isopropylamide.
  • an analogous method is described in U.S. Pat. No. 3,989,691 and M. Gates et. al. (1970) J. Amer. Chem. Soc., 92, 205, as well as Taylor et al. (1972) JACS 94, 6218.
  • reaction is a standard reductive alkylation using, e.g., sodium borohydride or sodium triacetoxyborohydride (Gribble, G. W. in Encyclopedia of Reagents for Organic Synthesis (Ed. Paquette, L. A.) (John Wiley and Sons, 1995), p 4649).
  • sodium borohydride or sodium triacetoxyborohydride Gribble, G. W. in Encyclopedia of Reagents for Organic Synthesis (Ed. Paquette, L. A.) (John Wiley and Sons, 1995), p 4649.
  • the process variant (xi) is a standard alkylation reaction well known to those skilled in the art, for example where an alcohol or amine is treated with an alkyl halide in the presence of a base (for example see March, J; Advanced Organic Chemistry, Edition 3 (John Wiley and Sons, 1985), p 364-366 and p 342-343).
  • the process is preferably carried out in a polar solvent such as N,N-dimethylformamide
  • the reaction is an alkylation, examples of which are described in J. Med. chem. (1979) 22(10) 1171-6.
  • the compound of formula (IV) may be prepared from the corresponding compound where X is NHR 11′ by acylation with an appropriate derivative of the acid WCH 2 COOH such as the acid chloride or sulphonation with an appropriate derivative of the sulphonic acid WCH 2 SO 3 H such as the sulphonyl chloride.
  • reaction is a standard sulphonamide formation reaction well known to those skilled in the art. This may be e.g. the reaction of a sulphonyl halide with an amine.
  • the hydroxy group in Y is preferably converted to an OM group where M is an alkali metal by treatment of an alcohol with a base.
  • the base is preferably inorganic such as NaH, lithium diisopropylamide or sodium.
  • X is OH
  • the hydroxy group in Y is activated under Mitsunobu conditions (Fletcher et al. J Chem Soc. (1995), 623).
  • X ⁇ O and Y ⁇ CH 2 OH groups can be reacted directly by activation with 1,3-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC) (Chem. Berichte 1962, 95, 2997 or Angewante Chemie 1963 75, 377).
  • DCC 1,3-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide
  • reaction is conducted in the presence of an organic base such as triethylamine or pyridine such as described by Fuhrman et.al., J. Amer. Chem. Soc.; 67, 1245, 1945.
  • organic base such as triethylamine or pyridine
  • the X ⁇ NR 11′ SO 2 W or Y ⁇ SO 2 W intermediates can be formed from the requisite amine e.g. by reaction with SO 2 Cl 2 analogously to the procedure described by the same authors Fuhrman et.al., J. Amer. Chem. Soc.; 67, 1245, 1945.
  • the leaving group W is preferably chloro, bromo or iodo or trifluoromethylsulphonyloxy and the reaction is the palladium catalysed process known as the “Buchwald” reaction (J. Yin and S. L. Buchwald, Org. Lett., 2000, 2, 1101).
  • reaction is the addition of an amine to an olefin which is susceptible to nucleophilic attack.
  • reaction is a three component condensation reaction carried out under mildly acidic conditions.
  • Reduction of a carbonyl group A or B to CHOH can be readily accomplished using reducing agents well known to those skilled in the art, e.g. sodium borohydride in aqueous ethanol or lithium aluminium hydride in ethereal solution. This is analogous to methods described in EP53964, U.S. Pat. No. 384,556 and J. Gutzwiller et al, J. Amer. Chem. Soc., 1978, 100, 576.
  • the carbonyl group A or B may be reduced to CH 2 by treatment with a reducing agent such as hydrazine in ethylene glycol, at e.g. 130-160° C., in the presence of potassium hydroxide.
  • a reducing agent such as hydrazine in ethylene glycol, at e.g. 130-160° C., in the presence of potassium hydroxide.
  • Reaction of a carbonyl group A or B with an organometallic reagent yields a group where R 6 or R 8 is OH and R 7 or R 9 is alkyl.
  • a hydroxy group on A or B may be oxidised to a carbonyl group by oxidants well known to those skilled in the art, for example, manganese dioxide, pyridinium chlorochromate or pyridinium dichromate.
  • a hydroxyalkyl A-B group CHR 7 CR 9 OH or CR 7 (OH)CHR 9 may be dehydrated to give the group CR 7 ⁇ CR 9 by treatment with an acid anhydride such as acetic anhydride.
  • Methods for conversion of CR 7 ⁇ CR 9 by reduction to CHR 7 CHR 9 are well known to those skilled in the art, for example using hydrogenation over palladium on carbon as catalyst.
  • Methods for conversion of CR 7 ⁇ CR 9 to give the A-B group CR 7 (OH)CHR 9 or CHR 7 CR 9 OH are well known to those skilled in the art for example by epoxidation and subsequent reduction by metal hydrides, hydration, hydroboration or oxymercuration.
  • An amide carbonyl group may be reduced to the corresponding amine using a reducing agent such as lithium aluminium hydride.
  • a hydroxy group in A or B may be converted to azido by activation and displacement e.g. under Mitsunobu conditions using hydrazoic acid or by treatment with diphenylphosphorylazide and base, and the azido group in turn may be reduced to amino by hydrogenation.
  • An example of a group Q 1 convertible to NR 2 R 4 is NR 2′ R 4′ or halogen.
  • Halogen may be displaced by an amine HNR 2′ R 4′ by a conventional alkylation.
  • the ketone of formula (VI) is reacted with an amine HNR 2′ R 4′ by conventional reductive alkylation as described above for process variant (x).
  • Examples of groups Z 1′ , Z 2′ and Z 3′ convertible to Z 1 , Z 2 and Z 3 include CR 1 or CR 1′ CR 1a′ where R 1′ and R 1a′ are groups convertible to R 1 and R 1a .
  • Z 1′ , Z 2′ and Z 3′ are preferably Z 1 , Z 2 and Z 3 .
  • R 1a′ , R 1′ and R 2′ are preferably R 1a , R 1 and R 2 .
  • R 2′ is preferably hydrogen.
  • R 3′ is R 3 or more preferably hydrogen, vinyl, alkoxycarbonyl or carboxy.
  • R 4 is R 4 or more preferably H or an N-protecting group such as t-butoxycarbonyl, benzyloxycarbonyl or 9-fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl.
  • R 1′ , R 1a′ , R 2′ , R 3 and R 4 and interconversions of R 1 , R 1a , R 2 , R 3 and R 4 are conventional.
  • suitable conventional hydroxy protecting groups which may be removed without disrupting the remainder of the molecule include acyl and alkylsilyl groups. N-protecting groups are removed by conventional methods.
  • R 1′ methoxy is convertible to R 1′ hydroxy by treatment with lithium and diphenylphosphine (general method described in Ireland et al, J. Amer. Chem. Soc., 1973, 7829) or HBr.
  • Alkylation of the hydroxy group with a suitable alkyl derivative bearing a leaving group such as halide and a protected amino, piperidyl, amidino or guanidino group or group convertible thereto yields, after conversion/deprotection, R 1 alkoxy substituted by optionally N-substituted amino, piperidyl, guanidino or amidino.
  • R 3 alkenyl is convertible to hydroxyalkyl by hydroboration using a suitable reagent such as 9-borabicyclo[3.3.1]nonane, epoxidation and reduction or oxymercuration.
  • R 3 1,2-dihydroxyalkyl can be prepared from R 3′ alkenyl using osmium tetroxide or other reagents well known to those skilled in the art (see Advanced Organic Chemistry, Ed. March, J., John Wiley and Sons, 1985, p 732-737 and refs. cited therein) or epoxidation followed by hydrolysis (see Advanced Organic Chemistry, Ed. March, J. John Wiley and Sons, 1985, p 332, 333 and refs. cited therein).
  • R 3 vinyl can be chain extended by standard homologation, e.g. by conversion to hydroxyethyl followed by oxidation to the aldehyde, which is then subjected to a Wittig reaction.
  • Opening an epoxide-containing R 3′ group with azide anion yields an azide derivative which can be reduced to the amine. Conversion of the amine to a carbamate is followed by ring closure with base to give the 2-oxo-oxazolidinyl containing R 3 group.
  • Substituted 2-oxo-oxazolidinyl containing R 3 groups may be prepared from the corresponding aldehyde by conventional reaction with a glycine anion equivalent, followed by cyclisation of the resulting amino alcohol (M. Grauert et al, Ann. Chem., 1985, 1817; Rozenberg et al, Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 1994, 33(1), 91).
  • the resulting 2-oxo-oxazolidinyl group contains a carboxy group which can be converted to other R 10 groups by standard procedures.
  • Carboxy groups within R 3 may be prepared by Jones' oxidation of the corresponding alcohols CH 2 OH using chromic acid and sulphuric acid in water/methanol (E. R. H. Jones et al, J. Chem. Soc., 1946, 39).
  • Other oxidising agents may be used for this transformation such as sodium periodate catalysed by ruthenium trichloride (G. F. Tutwiler et al, J. Med. Chem., 1987, 30(6), 1094), chromium trioxide-pyridine (G. Just et al, Synth. Commun., 1979, 9(7), 613), potassium permanganate (D. E. Reedich et al, J. Org. Chem., 1985, 50(19), 3535), and pyridinium chlorochromate (D. Askin et al, Tetrahedron Lett., 1988, 29(3), 277).
  • the carboxy group may alternatively be formed in a two stage process, with an initial oxidation of the alcohol to the corresponding aldehyde using for instance dimethyl sulphoxide activated with oxalyl chloride (N. Cohen et al, J. Am. Chem. Soc., 1983, 105, 3661) or dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (R. M. Wengler, Angew. Chim. Int. Ed. Eng., 1985, 24(2), 77), or oxidation with tetrapropylammonium perruthenate (Ley et al, J. Chem. Soc. Chem Commun., 1987, 1625).
  • dimethyl sulphoxide activated with oxalyl chloride N. Cohen et al, J. Am. Chem. Soc., 1983, 105, 3661
  • dicyclohexylcarbodiimide R. M. Wengler, Angew. Chim. Int. Ed
  • the aldehyde may then be separately oxidised to the corresponding acid using oxidising agents such as silver (II) oxide (R. Grigg et al, J. Chem. Soc. Perkin 1, 1983, 1929), potassium permanganate (A. Zurcher, Helv. Chim. Acta., 1987, 70 (7), 1937), sodium periodate catalysed by ruthenium trichloride (T. Sakata et al, Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., 1988, 61(6), 2025), pyridinium chlorochromate (R. S. Reddy et al, Synth. Commun., 1988, 18(51), 545) or chromium trioxide (R. M. Coates et al, J. Am. Chem. Soc., 1982, 104, 2198).
  • silver (II) oxide R. Grigg et al, J. Chem. Soc. Perkin 1, 1983, 1929
  • potassium permanganate A. Zurcher
  • R 3 CO 2 H group may also be prepared from oxidative cleavage of the corresponding diol, CH(OH)CH 2 OH, using sodium periodate catalysed by ruthenium trichloride with an acetonitrile-carbontetrachloride-water solvent system (V. S. Martin et al, Tetrahedron Letters, 1988, 29(22), 2701).
  • R 3 groups containing a cyano or carboxy group may also be prepared by conversion of an alcohol to a suitable leaving group such as the corresponding tosylate by reaction with para-toluenesulphonyl chloride (M. R. Bell, J. Med. Chem., 1970, 13, 389), or the iodide using triphenylphosphine, iodine, and imidazole (G. Lange, Synth. Commun., 1990, 20, 1473).
  • the second stage is the displacement of the leaving group with cyanide anion (L. A. Paquette et al, J. Org. Chem., 1979, 44(25). 4603; P. A. Grieco et al, J. Org.
  • R 3 cis or trans hydroxy may be introduced by the methods of van Deale et al., Drug Development Research 8:225-232 (1986) or Heterocycles 39(1), 163-170 (1994).
  • trans hydroxy a suitable method converts N-protected tetrahydropyridine to the epoxide by treatment with metachloroperbenzoic acid, followed by opening of the epoxide with a suitable amine NR 2′ R 4′ .
  • R 3′ hydroxy may then be converted to optionally substituted amino via preparation of the R 3′ amino derivative by standard transformations such as a Mitsunobu reaction (for example as reviewed in Misunobu, Synthesisi, (1981), 1), for example with succinimide in the presence of diethylazodicarboxylate and triphenylphosphine to give the phthalimidoethylpiperidine. Removal of the phthaloyl group, for example by treatment with methylhydrazine, affords the R 3′ amine. Optional substitution may then be introduced by standard methods for amine substitution well known to those skilled in the art.
  • Mitsunobu reaction for example as reviewed in Misunobu, Synthesisi, (1981), 1
  • succinimide in the presence of diethylazodicarboxylate and triphenylphosphine to give the phthalimidoethylpiperidine.
  • Removal of the phthaloyl group for example by treatment with methylhydrazine, affords
  • R 3 4-CF 3 may be introduced by the following scheme I:
  • ethyl isonipecotate (I-1) reacts with an appropriate acylating agent, preferably di-tert-butyl dicarbonate, to afford the protected derivative I-2.
  • Typical solvents for this reaction include CH 2 Cl 2 , THF, or DMF.
  • the protecting group for the amine must be compatible with subsequent chemistry, and must be readily removable when desired. Methods for the protection of amines are well-known to those of skill in the art, and are described in standard reference volumes, such as Greene “Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis” (published by Wiley-Interscience).
  • Alkylation of I-2 can be accomplished by reaction with an appropriate base, typically LDA or LiN(TMS) 2 , in an aprotic solvent, usually THF or DME, followed by trapping of the enolate with an appropriate electrophile, to afford I-3.
  • an appropriate base typically LDA or LiN(TMS) 2
  • an aprotic solvent usually THF or DME
  • Trifluoromethyl iodide (CF 3 I) or S-(trifluoromethyl)dibenzothiophenium trifluoromethanesulfonate are typically preferred as electrophilic trifluoromethylating reagents.
  • the ethyl ester of I-3 is hydrolyzed using aqueous base, for example, LiOH in aqueous THF or NaOH in aqueous methanol or ethanol, and the intermediate carboxylate salt is acidified with a suitable acid, for instance TFA or HCl, to afford the carboxylic acid I-4.
  • aqueous base for example, LiOH in aqueous THF or NaOH in aqueous methanol or ethanol
  • a suitable acid for instance TFA or HCl
  • Curtius-type rearrangement of I-4 gives an intermediate isocyanate, which typically is not isolated, but rather is reacted in situ with an appropriate alcohol, such as benzyl alcohol, to give I-5.
  • Diphenylphosphoryl azide in the presence of an amine base is the preferred reagent combination for effecting the Curtius-type rearrangement of I-4, but more classical conditions, such as formation of the acid chloride, reaction with azide anion, and warming of the acyl azide, can also be used.
  • the benzyloxycarbonyl group in I-5 is removed by hydrogenolysis in the presence of a palladium catalyst, typically palladium on activated charcoal, in a suitable solvent, usually EtOH, MeOH, EtOAc, or mixtures thereof, to give amine I-6.
  • R 3 2-CF 3 may be introduced by the following scheme II:
  • Imine II-1 prepared in standard fashion by acid-catalyzed reaction of trifluoroacetaldehyde ethyl hemiacetal and (R)-(+)- ⁇ -methylbenzylamine, reacts with a silyloxydiene, for example 1-methoxy-3-(trimethylsilyloxy)-1,3-butadiene, in a Diels-Alder reaction to afford piperidone II-2.
  • the reaction is conducted in a neutral solvent such as CH 3 CN, THF, or CH 2 Cl 2 , and oftentimes is mediated by a Lewis acid such as ZnCl 2 . Diastereomers are best separated at this point.
  • the enone II-2 is reduced to the corresponding ketone II-3 by reaction with L-Selectride® in a suitable solvent, generally THF or DME, and the ketone is converted to an oxime derivative under standard conditions well-known to those of skill in the art.
  • Reduction of the oxime derivative under standard conditions gives a mixture of diastereomeric amines from which the amine II-5 can be isolated.
  • the amine is protected with an appropriate protecting group, preferably a tert-butyl carbamate (see Scheme I), to afford II-6.
  • the ⁇ -methylbenzyl group of II-6 is removed by hydrogenolysis in the presence of a palladium catalyst, typically palladium on activated charcoal, in a suitable solvent, usually EtOH, MeOH, EtOAc, or mixtures thereof, to give amine II-7.
  • a palladium catalyst typically palladium on activated charcoal
  • a suitable solvent usually EtOH, MeOH, EtOAc, or mixtures thereof
  • R 3 3-CF 3 may be introduced by the following scheme III:
  • the commercially-available ketone III-1 is converted to the corresponding silly enroll ether III-2 by reaction with a silylating reagent, such a trimethylsilyl chloride or trimethylsilyl triflate, in the presence of an amine base, typically triethylamine, in a suitable solvent, such as diethyl ether, THF, DMF, or mixtures thereof.
  • a silylating reagent such as trimethylsilyl chloride or trimethylsilyl triflate
  • an amine base typically triethylamine
  • a suitable solvent such as diethyl ether, THF, DMF, or mixtures thereof.
  • the silly enroll ether III-2 reacts with an electrophilic trifluoromethylating reagent, such as trifluoromethyl iodide (CF 3 I) or more preferably S-(trifluoromethyl)dibenzothiophenium trifluoromethanesulfonate (see Tet. Lett.
  • Ketone III-3 reacts with a chiral amine, for instance (R)-(+)- ⁇ -methylbenzylamine, under standard acidic catalysis, to afford the imine derivative III-4, which can be reduced to afford amine III-5.
  • This type of reduction is typically conducted using sodium borohydride, sodium cyanoborohydride or sodium (triacetoxy)borohydride, in an appropriate solvent, such as EtOH, MeOH, THF, CH 2 Cl 2 , ClCH 2 CH 2 Cl, or mixtures thereof. Diastereomers are best separated at this point.
  • the ⁇ -methylbenzyl group of III-5 is removed by hydrogenolysis in the presence of a palladium catalyst, typically palladium on activated charcoal, in a suitable solvent, usually EtOH, MeOH, EtOAc, or mixtures thereof, to give amine III-6.
  • a palladium catalyst typically palladium on activated charcoal
  • a suitable solvent usually EtOH, MeOH, EtOAc, or mixtures thereof
  • R 3 2-oxo may be introduced by the following scheme IV:
  • the reaction is mediated by a strong base, preferably sodium hydride, which is used to deprotonate IV-2, and is typically conducted in a polar, aprotic solvent, such as THF, DMF, or mixtures thereof.
  • a strong base preferably sodium hydride
  • a polar, aprotic solvent such as THF, DMF, or mixtures thereof.
  • the benzyl groups in IV-3 are removed by hydrogenolysis in the presence of a palladium catalyst, typically palladium on activated charcoal, in a suitable solvent, usually EtOH, MeOH, EtOAc, or mixtures thereof, to give amine IV-4.
  • R 3 3-F may be introduced by the following scheme V:
  • an electrophilic fluorinating reagent preferably SelectfluorinTM (1-chloromethyl-4-fluoro-1,4-diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane bis(tetrafluoroborate)
  • a neutral solvent such as CH 3 CN
  • R 3 may be obtained by conventional conversions of hydroxy, carboxy or cyano groups.
  • Tetrazoles are conveniently prepared by reaction of sodium azide with the cyano group (e.g. F. Thomas et al, Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 1996, 6(6), 631; K. Kubo et al, J. Med. Chem., 1993, 36, 2182) or by reaction of azidotri-n-butyl stannane with the cyano group followed by acidic hydrolysis (P. L. Ornstein, J. Org. Chem., 1994, 59, 7682 and J. Med. Chem., 1996, 39 (11), 2219).
  • the tetrazol-5-ylaminocarbonyl group may be prepared from the corresponding carboxylic acid and 2-aminotetrazole by dehydration with standard peptide coupling agents such as 1,1′-carbonyldiimidazole (P. L. Ornstein et al, J. Med Chem, 1996, 39(11), 2232).
  • alkyl- and alkenyl-sulphonylcarboxamides are similarly prepared from the corresponding carboxylic acid and the alkyl- or alkenyl-sulphonamide by dehydration with standard peptide coupling agents such as 1,1′-carbonyldiimidazole (P. L. Ornstein et al, J. Med. Chem., 1996, 39(11), 2232).
  • hydroxamic acid groups are prepared from the corresponding acids by standard amide coupling reactions e.g. N. R. Patel et al, Tetrahedron, 1987, 43(22), 5375.
  • 2,4-Thiazolidinedione groups may prepared from the aldehydes by condensation with 2,4-thiazolidinedione and subsequent removal of the olefinic double bond by hydrogenation.
  • 1,2,4-Triazol-5-yl groups may be prepared from the corresponding nitrile by reaction with an alcohol under acid conditions followed by reaction with hydrazine and then an R 10 -substituted activated carboxylic acid (see J. B. Polya in “Comprehensive Heterocyclic Chemistry” Edition 1, p 762, Ed A. R. Katritzky and C. W. Rees, Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1984 and J. J. Ares et al, J. Heterocyclic Chem., 1991, 28(5), 1197).
  • R 3 alkyl or alkenyl may be interconverted by conventional methods, for example hydroxy may be derivatised by esterification, acylation or etherification. Hydroxy groups may be converted to halogen, thiol, alkylthio, azido, alkylcarbonyl, amino, aminocarbonyl, oxo, alkylsulphonyl, alkenylsulphonyl or aminosulphonyl by conversion to a leaving group and substitution by the required group or oxidation as appropriate or reaction with an activated acid, isocyanate or alkoxyisocyanate.
  • Primary and secondary hydroxy groups can be oxidised to an aldehyde or ketone respectively and alkylated with a suitable agent such as an organometallic reagent to give a secondary or tertiary alcohol as appropriate.
  • a carboxylate group may be converted to an hydroxymethyl group by reduction of an ester of this acid with a suitable reducing agent such as lithium aluminium hydride.
  • An NH 2 substituent on piperidine is converted to NR 2 R 4 by conventional means such as amide or sulphonamide formation with an acyl derivative R 5 COW or R 5 SO 2 W, for compounds where U is CO or SO 2 or, where U is CH 2 , by alkylation with an alkyl halide R 5 CH 2 -halide in the presence of base, acylation/reduction with an acyl derivative R 5 COW or reductive alkylation with an aldehyde R 5 CHO.
  • R 3 and R 6 , R 7 , R 8 or R 9 contains a carboxy group and the other contains a hydroxy or amino group they may together form a cyclic ester or amide linkage. This linkage may form spontaneously during coupling of the compound of formula (IV) and the piperidine moiety or in the presence of standard peptide coupling agents.
  • the isocyanate of formula (IV) may be prepared conventionally from a 4-amino derivative such as 4-amino-quinoline, and phosgene, or phosgene equivalent (eg triphosgene) or it may be prepared more conveniently from a 4-carboxylic acid by a “one-pot” Curtius Reaction with diphenyl phosphoryl azide (DPPA) [see T. Shiori et al. Chem. Pharm. Bull. 35, 2698-2704 (1987)].
  • DPPA diphenyl phosphoryl azide
  • the 4-amino derivatives are commercially available or may be prepared by conventional procedures from a corresponding 4-chloro or 4-trifluoromethanesulphonate derivative by treatment with ammonia (O. G. Backeberg et. al., J. Chem Soc., 381, 1942) or propylamine hydrochloride (R. Radinov et. al., Synthesis, 886, 1986).
  • 4-Alkenyl compounds of formula (IV) may be prepared by conventional procedures from a corresponding 4-halogeno-derivative by e.g. a Heck synthesis as described in e.g. Organic Reactions, 1982, 27, 345.
  • 4-Halogeno derivatives of compounds of formula (IV) are commercially available, or may be prepared by methods known to those skilled in the art.
  • a 4-chloroquinoline is prepared from the corresponding quinolin-4-one by reaction with phosphorus oxychloride (POCl 3 ) or phosphorus pentachloride, PCl 5 .
  • a 4-chloroquinazoline is prepared from the corresponding quinazolin-4-one by reaction with phosphorus oxychloride (POCl 3 ) or phosphorus pentachloride, PCl 5 .
  • a quinazolinone and quinazolines may be prepared by standard routes as described by T. A. Williamson in Heterocyclic Compounds, 6, 324 (1957) Ed. R. C. Elderfield.
  • 4-Carboxy derivatives of compounds of formula (IV) are commercially available or may be prepared by conventional procedures for preparation of carboxy heteroaromatics well known to those skilled in the art.
  • quinazolines may be prepared by standard routes as described by T. A. Williamson in Heterocyclic Compounds, 6, 324 (1957) Ed. R. C. Elderfield.
  • These 4-carboxy derivatives maybe activated by conventional means, e.g. by conversion to an acyl halide or anhydride.
  • Pyridazines may be prepared by routes analogous to those described in Comprehensive Heterocyclic Chemistry, Volume 3, Ed A. J. Boulton and A. McKillop and napthyridines may be prepared by routes analogous to those described in Comprehensive Heterocyclic Chemistry, Volume 2, Ed A. J. Boulton and A. McKillop.
  • a 4-oxirane derivative of compounds of formula (IV) is conveniently prepared from the 4-carboxylic acid by first conversion to the acid chloride with oxalyl chloride and then reaction with trimethylsilyldiazomethane to give the diazoketone derivative. Subsequent reaction with 5M hydrochloric acid gives the chloromethylketone. Reduction with sodium borohydride in aqueous methanol gives the chlorohydrin which undergoes ring closure to afford the epoxide on treatment with base, e.g. potassium hydroxide in ethanol-tetrahydrofuran.
  • 4-oxirane derivatives can be prepared from bromomethyl ketones which can be obtained from 4-hydroxy compounds by other routes well known to those skilled in he art.
  • hydroxy compounds can be converted to the corresponding 4-trifluoromethanesulphonates by reaction with trifluoromethanesulphonic anhydride under standard conditions (see K. Ritter, Synthesis, 1993, 735).
  • Conversion into the corresponding butyloxyvinyl ethers can be achieved by a Heck reaction with butyl vinyl ether under palladium catalysis according to the procedure of W. Cabri et al, J. Org. Chem, 1992, 57 (5), 1481.
  • the equivalent intermediates can be attained by Stille coupling of the trifluoromethanesulphonates or the analogous chloro derivatives with (1-ethoxyvinyl)tributyl tin, (T. R. Kelly, J. Org. Chem., 1996, 61, 4623).)
  • the alkyloxyvinyl ethers are then converted into the corresponding bromomethylketones by treatment with N-bromosuccinimide in aqueous tetrahydrofuran in a similar manner to the procedures of J. F. W. Keana, J. Org. Chem., 1983, 48, 3621 and T. R. Kelly, J. Org. Chem., 1996, 61, 4623.
  • the 4-hydroxyderivatives can be prepared from an aminoaromatic by reaction with methylpropiolate and subsequent cyclisation, analogous to the method described in N. E. Heindel et al, J. Het. Chem., 1969, 6, 77.
  • 5-amino-2-methoxy pyridine can be converted to 4-hydroxy-6-methoxy-[1,5]naphthyridine using this method.
  • the epoxide may be prepared from the 4-carboxaldehyde by a Wittig approach using trimethylsulfonium iodide [see G. A. Epling and K-Y Lin, J. Het. Chem., 1987, 24, 853-857], or by epoxidation of a 4-vinyl derivative.
  • 4-Hydroxy-1,5-naphthyridines can be prepared from 3-aminopyridine derivatives by reaction with diethyl ethoxymethylene malonate to produce the 4-hydroxy-3-carboxylic acid ester derivative with subsequent hydrolysis to the acid, followed by thermal decarboxylation in quinoline (as for example described for 4-Hydroxy-[1,5]naphthyridine-3-carboxylic acid, J. T. Adams et al., J. Amer. Chem. Soc., 1946, 68, 1317).
  • a 4-hydroxy-[1,5]naphthyridine can be converted to the 4-chloro derivative by heating in phosphorus oxychloride, or to the 4-methanesulphonyloxy or 4-trifluoromethanesulphonyloxy derivative by reaction with methanesulphonyl chloride or trifluoromethanesulphonic anhydride, respectively, in the presence of an organic base.
  • a 4-amino 1,5-naphthyridine can be obtained from the 4-chloro derivative by reaction with n-propylamine in pyridine.
  • 6-methoxy-1,5-naphthyridine derivatives can be prepared from 3-amino-6-methoxypyridine.
  • 1,5-Naphthyridines may be prepared by other methods well known to those skilled in the art (for examples see P. A. Lowe in “Comprehensive Heterocyclic Chemistry” Volume 2, p 581-627, Ed A. R. Katritzky and C. W. Rees, Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1984).
  • the 4-hydroxy and 4-amino-cinnolines may be prepared following methods well known to those skilled in the art [see A. R. Osborn and K. Schofield, J. Chem. Soc. 2100 (1955)].
  • a 2-aminoacetophenone is diazotised with sodium nitrite and acid to produce the 4-hydroxycinnoline with conversion to chloro and amino derivatives as described for 1,5-naphthyridines.
  • R A groups where the ring (y) is 4-pyridyl are available by the sequence described below, starting from an aromatic or heterocyclic amine (1), with at least one free CH position adjacent to the amine. Reaction with Meldrum's acid and trimethyl orthformate in ethanol at reflux affords the corresponding 2,2-dimethyl-5-phenylaminomethylene-[1,3]dioxane-4,6-dione derivatives (2). These can be cyclised at elevated temperatures (180-220° C.) in inert solvents such as Dowtherm to give the corresponding 1H-quinolin-4-one (3) or heterocyclic analogues eg 1H-[1,6]naphthyridin-4-one. These processes are well-established and are described by Walz and Sundberg (J. Org. Chem., 2000, 65 (23), 8001) and by Todter and Lackner (Synthesis, 1997 (5) 576).
  • Activation of the quinolone species related to (3) into the corresponding 4-quinolyl bromides (4) can be accomplished with phosphorous oxybromide or more preferably phosphorous tribromide in N,N-dimethylformamide (see M. Schstoff et al, Synlett, 1997, (9), 1096 and K. Gould et al, J. Med., Chem., 1988, 31 (7), 1445).
  • the corresponding chlorides (5) are available by using phosphoryl oxychloride (for instance C. W. Wright et al, J. Med., Chem., 2001, 44 (19), 3187).
  • the quinolone species may be activated to the corresponding 1,1,1-trifluoro-methanesulfonic acid quinolin-4-yl esters (6) by the action of agents such as triflic anhydride or more preferably N-trifluoromethanesulphonimide (see for example M. Alvarez et al, Tet 2000, 56 (23) 3703; M. Alvarez et al, Eur. J. Org., Chem., 2000, (5), 849; J. Joule et al, Tet, 1998, 54 (17), 4405; J. K. Stille et al, J.A.C.S., 1988, 110 (12), 4051).
  • agents such as triflic anhydride or more preferably N-trifluoromethanesulphonimide
  • Activated species such as (4), (5), and (6) can then be subjected to a variety of metal-catalysed coupling reactions, such as amidation with primary carboxamides to give compounds such as (7) following the procedures of S. L. Buchwald et al (J.A.C.S., 2001, 123, 4051 and 7727; Org. Lett., 1999, 1, 35) or Sonogashira coupling with acetylenes to give compounds such as (8) (see A. Droz et al, Helv. Chim. Acta., 2001, 84 (8), 2243; M. Belly et al, Synlett, 2001 (2), 222; M. Pirrung et al, J.A.C.S., 2001, 123 (16), 3638).
  • R A thieno[3,2-b]pyridin-7-yl, 2,3-dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-b]pyridin-8-yl, quinolin-8-yl and isoquinolin-5-yl derivatives are commercially available or prepared by conventional methods from commercially available or literature derivatives, for example 4H-thieno[3,2-b]pyridin-4-one, 2,3-dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-b]pyridine (prepared by the method of H. Neunhoffer et al, Chem., Ber., 1990, 123), 2-methoxy-quinolin-8-ylamine (prepared by the method of K.
  • R A quinoxalin-5-yl derivatives may be obtained from 2- or 3-methylquinoxalin-5-ol prepared as described by Y. Abe et al, J. Med. Chem., 1998, 41 (21), 4062 or from suitable substituted derivatives prepared by analogous methods.
  • R A 3-methoxyquinoxaline-5-yl derivatives may be obtained from 3-oxoquinoxalin-5-yl prepared by the general methods of F. J. Wolf et al., J.A.C.S. 1949, 71, 6, using a suitable methylating agent such as trimethylsilyl(diazomethane).
  • the corresponding 1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-quinoxalin-5-yl may be prepared by reduction with a suitable reducing agent such as sodium cyanoborohydride in the presence of an acid such as acetic acid.
  • the isoquinolin-8-yl system can be prepared from the appropriately substituted benzylamine by cyclocondensation with diethoxy-acetaldehyde (see, for example, K. Kido and Y. Watanabe, Chemical & Pharmaceutical Bulletin, 35(12), 4964-6; 1987).
  • 8-bromo-isoquinoline prepared by the method of F. T. Tyson, J.A.C.S., 1939, 61, N. Briet et al., Tetrahedron (2002), 58(29), 5761-5766 or W. D. Brown, et al., Synthesis (2002), (1), 83-86.
  • 183 can be subjected to N-oxidation and rearrangement to give 8-bromo-2H-isoquinolin-1-one. This can be N-methylated to give 8-bromo-2-methyl-2H-isoquinolin-1-one, an appropriate intermediate for the 2-methyl-1-oxo-1,2-dihydroisoquinolin-8-yl system.
  • the 1-methoxy-isoquinolin-8-yl system can also be obtained from the 8-bromoisoquinoline-N-oxide above by rearrangement with methyl chloroformate to give 8-bromo-1-methoxy-isoquinoline, an appropriate intermediate for the 1-methoxy-isoquinolin-8-yl system.
  • suitable amines may be prepared from the corresponding 4-substituted piperidine acid or alcohol.
  • an N-protected piperidine containing an acid bearing substituent can undergo a Curtius rearrangement and the intermediate isocyanate can be converted to a carbamate by reaction with an alcohol. Conversion to the amine may be achieved by standard methods well known to those skilled in the art used for amine protecting group removal.
  • an acid substituted N-protected piperidine can undergo a Curtius rearrangement e.g.
  • an N-protected piperidine containing an alcohol bearing substituent undergoes a Mitsunobu reaction (for example as reviewed in Mitsunobu, Synthesis , (1981), 1), for example with succinimide in the presence of diethyl azodicarboxylate and triphenylphosphine to give the phthalimidoethylpiperidine.
  • a Mitsunobu reaction for example as reviewed in Mitsunobu, Synthesis , (1981), 1
  • succinimide in the presence of diethyl azodicarboxylate and triphenylphosphine to give the phthalimidoethylpiperidine.
  • diethyl azodicarboxylate diethyl azodicarboxylate and triphenylphosphine
  • R 5 CH 2 -halides, acyl derivative R 5 COW and R 5 SO 2 W or aldehydes R 5 CHO are commercially available or are prepared conventionally.
  • the aldehydes may be prepared by partial reduction of the R 5 -ester with lithium aluminium hydride or di-isobutylaluminium hydride or more preferably by reduction to the alcohol, with lithium aluminium hydride or sodium borohydride or lithium triethylborohydride (see Reductions by the Alumino - and Borohydrides in Organic Synthesis, 2nd ed., Wiley, N.Y., 1997 ; JOC, 3197, 1984; Org. Synth.
  • the aldehydes may also be prepared from carboxylic acids in two stages by conversion to a mixed carbonate for example by reaction with isobutyl chloroformate followed by reduction with sodium borohydride (R. J.
  • R 5 COW may be prepared by activation of the R 5 -ester.
  • R 5 CH 2 -halides such as bromides may be prepared from the alcohol R 5 CH 2 OH by reaction with phosphorus tribromide in DCM/triethylamine.
  • aldehyde R 5 CHO and sulphonic acid derivative R 5 SO 2 W may be generated by treatment of the R 5 H heterocycle with suitable reagents.
  • suitable reagents for example benzoxazinones, or more preferably their N-methylated derivatives can be formylated with hexamine in either trifluoroacetic acid or methanesulfonic acid, in a modified Duff procedure [O. I. Petrov et al. Collect. Czech. Chem. Commun. 62, 494-497 (1997)].
  • 4-Methyl-4H-benzo[1,4]oxazin-3-one may also be formylated using dichloromethyl methyl ether and aluminium chloride giving exclusively the 6-formyl derivative.
  • the aldehyde R 5 CHO may be generated by conversion of an R 5 halogen or R 5 trifluoromethane sulphonyloxy derivative into an olefin with subsequent oxidative cleavage by standard methods. For example, reaction of a bromo derivative under palladium catalysis with trans-2-phenylboronic acid under palladium catalysis affords a styrene derivative which upon ozonolysis affords the required R 5 CHO (Stephenson, G. R., Adv. Asymmetric Synth. (1996), 275-298. Publisher: Chapman & Hall, London).
  • R 5 H heterocycles are commercially available or may be prepared by conventional methods.
  • a nitrophenol may be alkylated with for example ethyl bromoacetate and the resulting nitro ester reduced with Fe in acetic acid (alternatively Zn/AcOH/HCl or H 2 /Pd/C or H 2 /Raney Ni).
  • the resulting amine may undergo spontaneous cyclisation to the required benzoxazinone, or cyclisation may be induced by heating in acetic acid.
  • a nitrophenol may be reduced to the aminophenol, which is reacted with chloroacetyl chloride [method of X. Huang and C.
  • 2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-1H-pyrido[3,4-b][1,4]thiazine-7-carbaldehyde may be accessed from 5-fluoro-2-picoline (E. J. Blanz, F. A. French, J. R. DoAmaral and D. A. French, J. Med. Chem. 1970, 13, 1124-1130) by constructing the thiazinone ring onto the pyridyl ring then functionalising the methyl substituent.
  • the dioxin analogue of this aza substitution pattern 2,3-dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridine-7-carbaldehyde is accessible from Kojic acid by aminolysis from pyrone to pyridone then annelating the dioxin ring.
  • Other aza substitution patterns with pyridothiazin-3-one, pyridooxazin-3-one, and pyridodioxin ring systems are also accessible.
  • Ortho-aminothiophenols may be conveniently prepared and reacted as their zinc complexes [see for example V. Taneja et al Chem. Ind. 187 (1984)].
  • Benzoxazolones may be prepared from the corresponding aminophenol by reaction with carbonyl diimidazole, phosgene or triphosgene. Reaction of benzoxazolones with diphosphorus pentasulfide affords the corresponding 2-thione.
  • Thiazines and oxazines can be prepared by reduction of the corresponding thiazinone or oxazinone with a reducing agent such as lithium aluminium hydride.
  • amines R 2′ R 4′ NH are available commercially or prepared conventionally.
  • amines R 5 CH 2 NH 2 may be prepared from a bromomethyl derivative by reaction with sodium azide in dimethylformamide (DMF), followed by hydrogenation of the azidomethyl derivative over palladium-carbon.
  • DMF dimethylformamide
  • An alternative method is to use potassium phthalimide/DMF to give the phthalimidomethyl derivative, followed by reaction with hydrazine in DCM to liberate the primary amine.
  • the compounds of formula (I) may be prepared singly or as compound libraries comprising at least 2, for example 5 to 1,000 compounds, and more preferably 10 to 100 compounds of formula (I).
  • Libraries of compounds of formula (I) may be prepared by a combinatorial “split and mix” approach or by multiple parallel synthesis using either solution phase or solid phase chemistry, by procedures known to those skilled in the art.
  • a compound library comprising at least 2 compounds of formula (I) or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof.
  • Novel intermediates of formulae (IV) and (V) are also part of this invention.
  • antibacterial compounds according to the invention may be formulated for administration in any convenient way for use in human or veterinary medicine, by analogy with other antibacterials.
  • compositions of the invention include those in a form adapted for oral, topical or parenteral use and may be used for the treatment of bacterial infection in mammals including humans.
  • compositions may be formulated for administration by any route.
  • the compositions may be in the form of tablets, capsules, powders, granules, lozenges, creams or liquid preparations, such as oral or sterile parenteral solutions or suspensions.
  • topical formulations of the present invention may be presented as, for instance, ointments, creams or lotions, eye ointments and eye or ear drops, impregnated dressings and aerosols, and may contain appropriate conventional additives such as preservatives, solvents to assist drug penetration and emollients in ointments and creams.
  • the formulations may also contain compatible conventional carriers, such as cream or ointment bases and ethanol or oleyl alcohol for lotions.
  • suitable conventional carriers such as cream or ointment bases and ethanol or oleyl alcohol for lotions.
  • Such carriers may be present as from about 1% up to about 98% of the formulation. More usually they will form up to about 80% of the formulation.
  • Tablets and capsules for oral administration may be in unit dose presentation form, and may contain conventional excipients such as binding agents, for example syrup, acacia, gelatin, sorbitol, tragacanth, or polyvinylpyrrolidone; fillers, for example lactose, sugar, maize-starch, calcium phosphate, sorbitol or glycine; tabletting lubricants, for example magnesium stearate, talc, polyethylene glycol or silica; disintegrants, for example potato starch; or acceptable wetting agents such as sodium lauryl sulphate.
  • the tablets may be coated according to methods well known in normal pharmaceutical practice.
  • Oral liquid preparations may be in the form of, for example, aqueous or oily suspensions, solutions, emulsions, syrups or elixirs, or may be presented as a dry product for reconstitution with water or other suitable vehicle before use.
  • Such liquid preparations may contain conventional additives, such as suspending agents, for example sorbitol, methyl cellulose, glucose syrup, gelatin, hydroxyethyl cellulose, carboxymethyl cellulose, aluminium stearate gel or hydrogenated edible fats, emulsifying agents, for example lecithin, sorbitan monooleate, or acacia; non-aqueous vehicles (which may include edible oils), for example almond oil, oily esters such as glycerine, propylene glycol, or ethyl alcohol; preservatives, for example methyl or propyl p-hydroxybenzoate or sorbic acid, and, if desired, conventional flavouring or colouring agents.
  • suspending agents for example sorbitol, methyl cellulose, glucose syrup, gelatin, hydroxyethyl cellulose, carboxymethyl cellulose, aluminium stearate gel or hydrogenated edible fats, emulsifying agents, for example lecithin, sorbitan monooleate, or
  • Suppositories will contain conventional suppository bases, e.g. cocoa-butter or other glyceride.
  • fluid unit dosage forms are prepared utilizing the compound and a sterile vehicle, water being preferred.
  • the compound depending on the vehicle and concentration used, can be either suspended or dissolved in the vehicle.
  • the compound can be dissolved in water for injection and filter sterilised before filling into a suitable vial or ampoule and sealing.
  • agents such as a local anaesthetic, preservative and buffering agents can be dissolved in the vehicle.
  • the composition can be frozen after filling into the vial and the water removed under vacuum.
  • the dry lyophilized powder is then sealed in the vial and an accompanying vial of water for injection may be supplied to reconstitute the liquid prior to use.
  • Parenteral suspensions are prepared in substantially the same manner except that the compound is suspended in the vehicle instead of being dissolved and sterilization cannot be accomplished by filtration.
  • the compound can be sterilised by exposure to ethylene oxide before suspending in the sterile vehicle.
  • a surfactant or wetting agent is included in the composition to facilitate uniform distribution of the compound.
  • compositions may contain from 0.1% by weight, preferably from 10-60% by weight, of the active material, depending on the method of administration. Where the compositions comprise dosage units, each unit will preferably contain from 50-500 mg of the active ingredient.
  • the dosage as employed for adult human treatment will preferably range from 100 to 3000 mg per day, for instance 1500 mg per day depending on the route and frequency of administration. Such a dosage corresponds to 1.5 to 50 mg/kg per day. Suitably the dosage is from 5 to 20 mg/kg per day.
  • the compound of formula (I) may be the sole therapeutic agent in the compositions of the invention or a combination with other antibacterials. If the other antibacterial is a ⁇ -lactam then a ⁇ -lactamase inhibitor may also be employed.
  • the hydroxypyridine (f) (30 g, 0.14 mol) was suspended in acetone (200 ml), and potassium carbonate (39 g, 0.28 mol) was added, followed by ethyl bromoacetate (15.7 ml, 0.14 mmol).
  • the reaction was heated at reflux for 10 hours, then was cooled to room temperature and diluted with Et 2 O.
  • the precipitate was removed by suction filtration, and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to afford material (38 g, 89%), which was used without further purification.
  • nitropyridine (g) 38 g, 0.125 mol was dissolved in glacial AcOH (150 ml), and iron powder (20 g, 0.36 mole) was added. The mixture was mechanically stirred and heated at 90° C. for 5 hours, then was cooled to room temperature and diluted with EtOAc (300 ml). The mixture was filtered through a pad of silica gel and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and the residue recrystallized from MeOH (15 g, 52%).
  • the pyridine (i) (1.2 g, 4.8 mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (200 ml) and the solution was cooled to ⁇ 78° C. Ozone was bubbled through the solution with stirring until a pale blue color appeared, then the excess ozone was removed by bubbling oxygen through the solution for 15 min. Dimethylsulfide (1.76 ml, 24 mmol) was added to the solution, and the reaction was stirred at ⁇ 78° C. for 3 hours, then at room temperature overnight. The solvent was removed in vacuo, and the residue was triturated with Et 2 O (50 ml). The collected solid was washed with additional Et 2 O and dried to afford a solid (700 mg, 82%).
  • the alcohol (e) in methanol is stirred with potassium carbonate for 1 hour, then is evaporated and chromatographed on silica gel to give the product.
  • a 1:1 mixture of oxirane (2f) and piperidine (2i) is heated at 85° C. for 3 hr and the product chromatographed on silica gel.
  • the carbamate (2j) is hydrogenated in methanol at room temperature over 10% palladium charcoal, filtered and evaporated to afford the product.
  • 1,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridine (15.0 g, 180 mmole) was added to a 10% aqueous solution of Na 2 CO 3 (50 ml) and the solution was cooled to 0° C.
  • Di-tert-butyl dicarbonate 39.8 g, 182 mmole was added in portions over 15 min with vigorous stirring. The solution was stirred at 0° C. for 1 hr and then warmed to room temperature and stirred for an additional 18 hr.
  • the reaction solution was partitioned between Et 2 O and saturated NaCl solution. The ether layer was dried over Na 2 SO 4 and concentrated in vacuo to give an oil (31.80 g, 96%), which needed no further purification.
  • Enamine (4b) (22.9 g) was added portionwise to refluxing Dowtherm A (45 mL) over 3 minutes. After a further 3 minutes at reflux the mixture was cooled to room temperature. Ethyl acetate/hexane (10 mL/20 mL) was added and a black solid isolated by filtration. This residue was dissolved in hot methanol (400 mL) and filtered through Keiselguhr. Water (800 mL) was added and the mixture stored at 5° C. overnight. Filtration and drying afforded a pale yellow solid (10.3 g, 61%).
  • the ketone (5i) (2.83 g, 10.07 mmol) was partially dissolved in methanol (50 mL).
  • the reaction mixture was cooled down to 0° C. before sodium borohydride (0.78 g, 20.6 mmol) was added portionwise.
  • the reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 1 hour. More sodium borohydride was added (0.14 g) and the new reaction mixture was stirred for a further 20 minutes.
  • Cesium carbonate (7.5 g, 20 mmol) was then added and the reaction mixture was allowed to reach room temperature. Stirring at room temperature was continued for 3 days until total conversion to epoxide.
  • the mixture was diluted with water and extracted several times with dichloromethane.
  • the free base was prepared as in Example 5 from amine (5l) (30 mg, 0.1 mmol) and aldehyde (6c) (16 mg, 0.1 mmol).
  • Triflate (2c) (2.50 g, 8.14 mmol) was dissolved in DMF (25 mL). After subsequent addition of butyl vinyl ether (4.21 mL, 32.55 mmol), palladium acetate (0.182 g, 0.81 mmol), 1,3-bis(diphenylphosphino)propane (0.334 g, 0.81 mmol), and N,N-diisopropylethylamine (4.25 mL, 24.4 mmol), the reaction was heated to 60° C. and stirred for 18 hours. The solution was then cooled to ambient temperature and poured into a saturated NaHCO 3 solution. The solution was then extracted with EtOAc and washed with water (3 ⁇ ). The organic layer was then dried over Na 2 SO 4 , filtered, and the solvent removed under reduced pressure yielding an oil (2.80 g, >100% crude). 1
  • the ketone (8c) (0.25 g, 0.627 mmol) was dissolved in tetrahydrofuran (10 mL) and the solution cooled to 0° C. NaBH 4 (0.024 g, 0.627 mmol) was added and the solution stirred at 0° C. for 2 hours and allowed to warm to ambient temperature overnight. The reaction was not complete, and thus another equivalent of NaBH 4 (0.024 g, 0.627 mmol) was added at 0° C. The solution was allowed to warm to ambient temperature and was stirred for 3 more hours. The reaction was quenched with saturated NaHCO 3 solution and diluted with ethyl acetate.
  • the carbamate (8d) (0.158 g, 0.394 mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (2 mL). HCl in dioxane (1.0M:5 mL:5 mmol) was added and the solution allowed to stir at room temperature for 18 hours. The solvent and excess HCl were removed under reduced pressure, yielding the di-HCl salt (0.144 g, 98%) as a yellow solid.
  • the trihydrochloride salt of amine (9b) (0.36 mmol, 180 mg) was dissolved in 3 mL of 1:1 dichloromethane:methanol and treated with sodium bicarbonate (1.8 mmol, 152 mg) and carbaldehyde (2o) (0.36 mmol, 70 mg) and stirred overnight.
  • the suspension was treated with sodium triacetoxyborohydride (0.54 mmol, 114 mg) and stirred overnight.
  • the resulting reaction mixture was diluted with dichloromethane and poured into saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate.
  • Racemic cis-4-tert-butoxycarbonylamino-3-hydroxy-piperidine-1-carboxylic acid benzyl ester was prepared according to the procedure outlined by Kim et al. [Syn. Comm. 2001, 31, 1081-1089] starting from 3,6-dihydro-2H-pyridine-1-carboxylic acid benzyl ester.
  • the carbamate (10d) was dissolved in dichloromethane. 4M HCl in dioxane was added and the solution allowed to stir at room temperature for 18 hours. The solvent and excess HCl were removed under reduced pressure, yielding the di-HCl salt as a yellow solid.
  • the dihydrochloride salt (10e) (1.4 mmol, 650 mg) was dissolved in 3 mL methanol and diluted with 9 mL dichloromethane. The solution was treated with triethylamine (7.1 mmol, 0.99 mL) and aldehyde (1j) (1.4 mmol, 253 mg) and stirred overnight. The resulting solution was treated with sodium borohydride (1.4 mmol, 54 mg) and stirred two hours. The reaction mixture was diluted with chloroform and poured into saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution.
  • Dihydrochloride (10e) (1.4 mmol, 650 mg) was dissolved in 3 mL methanol and diluted with 9 mL dichloromethane. The solution was treated with triethylamine (7.1 mmol, 0.99 mL) and aldehyde (2o) (1.4 mmol, 345 mg, at 80% purity) and stirred overnight. The resulting solution was treated with sodium borohydride (1.4 mmol, 54 mg) and stirred two hours. The reaction mixture was diluted with chloroform and poured into saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution.
  • the MIC ( ⁇ g/ml) of test compounds against various organisms was determined including: S. epidermidis CL7 , S. aureus WCUH29 , S. pneumoniae 1629 , S. pyogenes CN10 , H. influenzae ATCC 49247 , E. faecalis 2 , M. catarrhalis Ravasio, E. coli 7623.
  • Examples 1, 5, 6, 7, 8, 11, 13 have an MIC ⁇ 2 ⁇ g/ml versus all these organisms.
  • Examples 4, 10, 12 have an MIC ⁇ 16 ⁇ g/ml versus all these organisms.
  • Example 9 has an MIC ⁇ 16 ⁇ g/ml versus some of these organisms.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Oncology (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Communicable Diseases (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Nitrogen Condensed Heterocyclic Rings (AREA)
  • Plural Heterocyclic Compounds (AREA)
  • Nitrogen And Oxygen Or Sulfur-Condensed Heterocyclic Ring Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Piperidine derivatives and pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof useful in methods of treatment of bacterial infections in mammals, particularly in man.

Description

  • This invention relates to novel compounds, compositions containing them and their use as antibacterials.
  • WO99/37635, WO00/21948, WO00/21952, WO00/43383, WO00/8748, WO01/07432, WO01/07433, WO02/08224, WO02/24684, WO02/50040, WO02/56882, WO02/96907, PCT/EP02/05708, WO03010138, WO01/25227, WO0240474 and WO0207572 disclose cyclohexane, piperidine and piperazine derivatives having antibacterial activity.
  • This invention provides a compound of formula (1) or a pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof:
    Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00001
    wherein:
    • RA is an optionally substituted bicyclic carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring system of structure:
      Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00002
      containing 0-3 heteroatoms in each ring in which:
      • at least one of rings (x) and (y) is aromatic;
      • one of Z4 and Z5 is C or N and the other is C;
      • Z3 is N, NR13, O, S(O)x, CO, CR1 or CR1R1a;
      • Z1 and Z2 are independently a 2 or 3 atom linker group each atom of which is independently selected from N, NR13, O, S(O)x, CO, CR1 and CR1R1a; such that each ring is independently substituted with 0-3 groups R1 and/or R1a;
    • one of Z1, Z2, Z3, Z4 and Z5 is N, one is CR1a and the remainder are CH, or one of Z1, Z2, Z3, Z4 and Z5 is CR1a and the remainder are CH;
    • R1 and R1a are independently hydrogen; hydroxy; (C1-6)alkoxy optionally substituted by (C1-6)alkoxy, amino, piperidyl, guanidino or amidino any of which is optionally N-substituted by one or two (C1-6)alkyl, acyl or (C1-6)alkylsulphonyl groups, CONH2, hydroxy, (C1-6)alkylthio, heterocyclylthio, heterocyclyloxy, arylthio, aryloxy, acylthio, acyloxy or (C1-6)alkylsulphonyloxy; (C1-6)alkoxy-substituted(C1-6)alkyl; hydroxy (C1-6)alkyl; halogen; (C1-6)alkyl; (C1-6)alkylthio; trifluoromethyl; trifluoromethoxy; cyano; carboxy; nitro; azido; acyl; acyloxy; acylthio; (C1-6)alkylsulphonyl; (C1-6)alkylsulphoxide; arylsulphonyl; arylsulphoxide or an amino, piperidyl, guanidino or amidino group optionally N-substituted by one or two (C1-6)alkyl, acyl or (C1-6)alkylsulphonyl groups, or when Z3 and the adjacent atom are CR1 and CR1a , R1 and R1a may together represent (C1-2)alkylenedioxy;
      provided that R1 and R1a, on the same carbon atom are not both optionally substituted hydroxy or amino;
      provided that
    • (i) when RA is optionally substituted quinolin-4-yl:
      • it is unsubstituted in the 6-position; or
      • it is substituted by at least one hydroxy (C1-6)alkyl, cyano or carboxy group at the 2-, 5-, 6-, 7- or 8-position; or
      • it is substituted by at least one trifluoromethoxy group; or
      • R1 and R1a together represent (C1-2)alkylenedioxy;
    • (ii) when RA is optionally substituted quinazolin-4-yl, cinnolin-4-yl, 1,5-naphthyridin-4-yl, 1,7-naphthyridin-4-yl or 1,8-naphthyridin-4-yl:
      • it is substituted by at least one hydroxy (C1-6)alkyl, cyano or carboxy group at the 2-, 5-, 6-, 7- or 8-position as available; or
      • it is substituted by at least one trifluoromethoxy group; or
      • R1 and R1a together represent (C1-2)alkylenedioxy;
    • R2 is hydrogen, or (C1-4)alkyl or (C2-4)alkenyl optionally substituted with 1 to 3 groups selected from:
    • amino optionally substituted by one or two (C1-4)alkyl groups; carboxy; (C1-4)alkoxycarbonyl; (C1-4)alkylcarbonyl; (C2-4)alkenyloxycarbonyl; (C2-4)alkenylcarbonyl; aminocarbonyl wherein the amino group is optionally substituted by hydroxy, (C1-4)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-4)alkyl, aminocarbonyl(C1-4)alkyl, (C2-4)alkenyl, (C1-4)alkylsulphonyl, trifluoromethylsulphonyl, (C2-4)alkenylsulphonyl, (C1-4)alkoxycarbonyl, (C1-4)alkylcarbonyl, (C2-4)alkenyloxycarbonyl or (C2-4)alkenylcarbonyl; cyano; tetrazolyl; 2-oxo-oxazolidinyl optionally substituted by R10; 3-hydroxy-3-cyclobutene-1,2-dione-4-yl; 2,4-thiazolidinedione-5-yl; tetrazol-5-ylaminocarbonyl; 1,2,4-triazol-5-yl optionally substituted by R10; 5-oxo-1,2,4-oxadiazol-3-yl; halogen; (C1-4)alkylthio; trifluoromethyl; hydroxy optionally substituted by (C1-4)alkyl, (C2-4)alkenyl, (C1-4)alkoxycarbonyl, (C1-4)alkylcarbonyl, (C2-4)alkenyloxycarbonyl, (C2-4)alkenylcarbonyl; oxo; (C1-4)alkylsulphonyl; (C2-4)alkenylsulphonyl; or (C1-4)aminosulphonyl wherein the amino group is optionally substituted by (C1-4)alkyl or (C2-4)alkenyl;
    • R3 is hydrogen; or
    • R3 is in the 2-, 3- or 4-position and is:
    • trifluoromethyl; carboxy; (C1-6)alkoxycarbonyl; (C2-6)alkenyloxycarbonyl; aminocarbonyl wherein the amino group is optionally substituted by hydroxy, (C1-6)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-6)alkyl, aminocarbonyl(C1-6)alkyl, (C2-6)alkenyl, (C1-6)alkylsulphonyl, trifluoromethylsulphonyl, (C2-6)alkenylsulphonyl, (C1-6)alkoxycarbonyl, (C1-6)alkylcarbonyl, (C2-6)alkenyloxycarbonyl or (C2-6)alkenylcarbonyl and optionally further substituted by (C1-6)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-6)alkyl, aminocarbonyl(C1-6)alkyl or (C2-6)alkenyl; cyano; tetrazolyl; 2-oxo-oxazolidinyl optionally substituted by R10; 3-hydroxy-3-cyclobutene-1,2-dione-4-yl; 2,4-thiazolidinedione-5-yl; tetrazol-5-ylaminocarbonyl; 1,2,4-triazol-5-yl optionally substituted by R10; or 5-oxo-1,2,4-oxadiazol-3-yl; or
    • (C1-4)alkyl or ethenyl optionally substituted with any of the substituents listed above for R3 and/or 0 to 2 groups R12 independently selected from:
      • halogen; (C1-6)alkylthio; trifluoromethyl; (C1-6)alkoxycarbonyl; (C1-6)alkylcarbonyl; (C2-6)alkenyloxycarbonyl; (C2-6)alkenylcarbonyl; hydroxy optionally substituted by (C1-6)alkyl, (C2-6)alkenyl, (C1-6)alkoxycarbonyl, (C1-6)alkylcarbonyl, (C2-6)alkenyloxycarbonyl, (C2-6)alkenylcarbonyl or aminocarbonyl wherein the amino group is optionally substituted by (C1-6)alkyl, (C2-6)alkenyl, (C1-6)alkylcarbonyl or (C2-6)alkenylcarbonyl; amino optionally mono- or disubstituted by (C1-6)alkoxycarbonyl, (C1-6)alkylcarbonyl, (C2-6)alkenyloxycarbonyl, (C2-6)alkenylcarbonyl, (C1-6)alkyl, (C2-6)alkenyl, (C1-6)alkylsulphonyl, (C2-6)alkenylsulphonyl or aminocarbonyl wherein the amino group is optionally substituted by (C1-6)alkyl or (C2-6)alkenyl; aminocarbonyl wherein the amino group is optionally substituted by (C1-6)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-6)alkyl, aminocarbonyl(C1-6)alkyl, (C2-6)alkenyl, (C2-6)alkoxycarbonyl, (C1-6)alkylcarbonyl, (C2-6)alkenyloxycarbonyl or (C2-6)alkenylcarbonyl and optionally further substituted by (C1-6)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-6)alkyl, aminocarbonyl(C1-6)alkyl or (C2-6)alkenyl; oxo; (C1-6)alkylsulphonyl; (C2-6)alkenylsulphonyl; or (C1-6)aminosulphonyl wherein the amino group is optionally substituted by (C1-6)alkyl or (C2-6)alkenyl; or
    • R3 is in the 2-position and is oxo; or
    • R3 is in the 3-position and is fluorine, amino optionally substituted by a group selected from hydroxy, (C1-6)alkylsulphonyl, trifluoromethylsulphonyl, (C2-6)alkenylsulphonyl, (C1-6)alkylcarbonyl, (C2-6)alkenylcarbonyl, (C1-6)alkoxycarbonyl, (C2-6)alkenyloxycarbonyl, (C1-6)alkyl and (C2-6)alkenyl, wherein a (C1-6)alkyl or (C2-6)alkenyl moiety may be optionally substituted with up to 2 groups R12, or hydroxy optionally substituted as described above for R12 hydroxy;
    • in addition when R3 is disubstituted with a hydroxy or amino containing substituent and carboxy containing substituent these may together form a cyclic ester or amide linkage, respectively;
    • R4 is a group -U-R5 where
    • U is selected from CO, SO2 and CH2 and
    • R5 is an optionally substituted bicyclic carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring system (A):
      Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00003
      containing up to four heteroatoms in each ring in which
      • at least one of rings (a)and (b) is aromatic;
      • X1 is C or N when part of an aromatic ring, or CR14 when part of a non-aromatic ring;
      • X2 is N, NR13, O, S(O)x, CO or CR14 when part of an aromatic or non-aromatic ring or may in addition be CR14R15 when part of a non aromatic ring;
      • X3 and X5 are independently N or C;
      • Y1 is a 0 to 4 atom linker group each atom of which is independently selected from N, NR13, O, S(O)x, CO and CR14 when part of an aromatic or non-aromatic ring or may additionally be CR14R15 when part of a non aromatic ring;
      • Y2 is a 2 to 6 atom linker group, each atom of Y2 being independently selected from N, NR13, O, S(O)x, CO, CR14 when part of an aromatic or non-aromatic ring or may additionally be CR14R15 when part of a non aromatic ring;
      • each of R14 and R15 is independently selected from: H; (C1-4)alkylthio; halo; carboxy(C1-4)alkyl; halo(C1-4)alkoxy; halo(C1-4)alkyl; (C1-4)alkyl; (C2-4)alkenyl; (C1-4)alkoxycarbonyl; formyl; (C1-4)alkylcarbonyl; (C2-4)alkenyloxycarbonyl; (C2-4)alkenylcarbonyl; (C1-4)alkylcarbonyloxy; (C1-4)alkoxycarbonyl(C1-4)alkyl; hydroxy; hydroxy(C1-4)alkyl; mercapto(C1-4)alkyl; (C1-4)alkoxy; nitro; cyano; carboxy; amino or aminocarbonyl optionally substituted as for corresponding substituents in R3; (C1-4)alkylsulphonyl; (C2-4)alkenylsulphonyl; or aminosulphonyl wherein the amino group is optionally mono- or di-substituted by (C1-4)alkyl or (C2-4)alkenyl; aryl; aryl(C1-4)alkyl; aryl(C1-4)alkoxy or
      • R14 and R15 may together represent oxo;
      • each R13 is independently H; trifluoromethyl; (C1-4)alkyl optionally substituted by hydroxy, (C1-6)alkoxy, (C1-6)alkylthio, halo or trifluoromethyl; (C2-4)alkenyl; aryl; aryl (C1-4)alkyl; arylcarbonyl; heteroarylcarbonyl; (C1-4)alkoxycarbonyl; (C1-4)alkylcarbonyl; formyl; (C1-6)alkylsulphonyl; or aminocarbonyl wherein the amino group is optionally substituted by (C1-4)alkoxycarbonyl, (C1-4)alkylcarbonyl, (C2-4)alkenyloxycarbonyl, (C2-4)alkenylcarbonyl, (C1-4)alkyl or (C2-4)alkenyl and optionally further substituted by (C1-4)alkyl or (C2-4)alkenyl;
    • each x is independently 0, 1 or 2
    • n is 0 and AB is NR11CO, CO—CR8R9, CR6R7—CO, NHR11SO2, CR6R7—SO2 or CR6R7 13 CR8R9, provided that R8 and R9 are not optionally substituted hydroxy or amino and R6 and R8 do not represent a bond:
    • or n is 1 and AB is NR11CO, CO—CR8R9, CR6R7—CO, NR11SO2, CONR11, CR6R7—CR8R9, O—CR8R9 or NR11—CR8R9;
    • provided that R6 and R7, and R8 and R9 are not both optionally substituted hydroxy or amino;
    • and wherein:
    • each of R6, R7, R8 and R9 is independently selected from: H; (C1-6)alkoxy; (C1-6)alkylthio; halo; trifluoromethyl; azido; (C1-6)alkyl; (C2-6)alkenyl; (C1-6)alkoxycarbonyl; (C1-6)alkylcarbonyl; (C2-6)alkenyloxycarbonyl; (C2-6)alkenylcarbonyl; hydroxy, amino or aminocarbonyl optionally substituted as for corresponding substituents in R3; (C1-6)alkylsulphonyl; (C2-6)alkenylsulphonyl; or (C1-6)aminosulphonyl wherein the amino group is optionally substituted by (C1-6)alkyl or (C2-6)alkenyl;
    • or R6 and R8 together represent a bond and R7 and R9 are as above defined;
    • R10 is selected from (C1-4)alkyl; (C2-4)alkenyl and aryl any of which may be optionally substituted by a group R12 as defined above; carboxy; aminocarbonyl wherein the amino group is optionally substituted by hydroxy, (C1-6)alkyl, (C2-6)alkenyl, (C1-6)alkylsulphonyl, trifluoromethylsulphonyl, (C2-6)alkenylsulphonyl, (C1-6)alkoxycarbonyl, (C1-6)alkylcarbonyl, (C2-6)alkenyloxycarbonyl or (C2-6)alkenylcarbonyl and optionally further substituted by (C1-6)alkyl or (C2-6)alkenyl; and
    • R11 is hydrogen; trifluoromethyl, (C1-6)alkyl; (C2-6)alkenyl; (C1-6)alkoxycarbonyl; (C1-6)alkylcarbonyl; or aminocarbonyl wherein the amino group is optionally substituted by (C1-6)alkoxycarbonyl, (C1-6)alkylcarbonyl, (C2-6)alkenyloxycarbonyl, (C2-6)alkenylcarbonyl, (C1-6)alkyl or (C2-6)alkenyl and optionally further substituted by (C1-6)alkyl or (C2-6)alkenyl;
    • or where one of R3 and R6, R7, R8 or R9 contains a carboxy group and the other contains a hydroxy or amino group they may together form a cyclic ester or amide linkage.
  • This invention also provides a method of treatment of bacterial infections in mammals, particularly in man, which method comprises the administration to a mammal in need of such treatment an effective amount of a compound of formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof.
  • The invention also provides the use of a compound of formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof, in the manufacture of a medicament for use in the treatment of bacterial infections in mammals.
  • The invention also provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • In one aspect RA is not indole or benzofuran.
  • Preferably Z2 is three atoms long.
  • Preferably Z4 and Z5 are both carbon.
  • Preferably Z1 is three atoms long with carbon joined to Z3 and with R1 on the carbon atom joined to Z3.
  • In one preferred aspect, RA is aromatic and ring (y) is fused benzene. Preferably (x) is 6-membered containing one or two nitrogen atoms, the remainder being carbon. Most preferably Z3 is nitrogen and the remainder are carbon or Z1 is ═CH—CH═N— (N attached to Z5).
  • In another preferred aspect, ring (y) is fused pyridin-4-yl (Z2 is three atoms long, the atom attached to Z5 in Z2 is nitrogen and the remainder and Z4 and Z5 are carbon), Z1 is two or three atoms long and Z3 is a heteroatom such as O or S.
  • Suitable examples of rings RA include optionally substituted isoquinolin-5-yl, quinolin-8-yl, thieno[3,2-b]pyridin-7-yl, 2,3-dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-b]pyridin-8-yl, quinoxalin-5-yl, isoquinolin-8-yl, [1,6]-naphthyridin-4-yl, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydroquinoxalin-5-yl and 1,2-dihydroisoquinoline-8-yl. Most preferably RA is optionally 2-substituted-quinolin-8-yl or optionally 3-substituted-quinoxalin-5-yl.
  • R13 in rings (x) and (y) is preferably H or (C1-6)alkyl.
  • When R1 or R1a is substituted alkoxy it is preferably (C2-6)alkoxy substituted by optionally N-substituted amino, or (C1-6)alkoxy substituted by piperidyl. Suitable examples of R1 and R1a alkoxy include methoxy, trifluoromethoxy, n-propyloxy, iso-butyloxy, aminoethyloxy, aminopropyloxy, aminobutyloxy, aminopentyloxy, guanidinopropyloxy, piperidin-4-ylmethyloxy or 2-aminocarbonylprop-2-oxy.
  • Preferably R1 and R1a are independently hydrogen, (C1-4)alkoxy, (C1-4)alkylthio, (C1-4)alkyl, amino(C3-5)alkyloxy, nitro, cyano, carboxy, hydroxymethyl or halogen; more preferably hydrogen, methoxy, methyl, cyano, halogen or amino(C3-5)alkyloxy. Ring RA is preferably substituted by one group R1. Most preferably R1 is H, methoxy, methyl, cyano or halogen and R1a is H. Halogen is preferably chloro or fluoro.
  • Preferably n is 0.
  • R2 is preferably hydrogen; (C1-4)alkyl substituted with carboxy, optionally substituted hydroxy, optionally substituted aminocarbonyl, optionally substituted amino or (C1-4)alkoxycarbonyl; or (C2-4)alkenyl substituted with (C1-4)alkoxycarbonyl or carboxy. More preferred groups for R2 are hydrogen, carboxymethyl, hydroxyethyl, aminocarbonylmethyl, ethoxycarbonylmethyl, ethoxycarbonylalkyl and carboxyalkyl, most preferably hydrogen.
  • Preferred examples of R3 include hydrogen; optionally substituted hydroxy; optionally substituted amino; halogen; (C1-4)alkoxycarbonyl; (C1-4) alkyl; ethenyl; optionally substituted 1-hydroxy-(C1-4) alkyl; optionally substituted aminocarbonyl; carboxy(C1-4)alkyl; optionally substituted aminocarbonyl(C1-4)alkyl; cyano(C1-4)alkyl; optionally substituted 2-oxo-oxazolidinyl and optionally substituted 2-oxo-oxazolidinyl(C1-4alkyl). More preferred R3 groups are hydrogen; CONH2; 1-hydroxyalkyl e.g. CH2OH, CH(OH)CH2CN; CH2CO2H; CH2CONH2; CONHCH2CONH2; 1,2-dihydroxyalkyl e.g. CH(OH)CH2OH; CH2CN; 2-oxo-oxazolidin-5-yl, 2-oxo-oxazolidin-5-yl(C1-4alkyl); optionally substituted hydroxy; optionally substituted amino; and halogen, in particular fluoro. Most preferably R3 is hydrogen, hydroxy or fluoro.
  • R3 is preferably in the 3- or 4-position.
  • When R3 is in the 3-position, preferably it is trans to (NR2)R4 and has R stereochemistry or is cis to NR2R4 and has S stereochemistry.
  • When R3 and R6, R7, R8 or R9 together form a cyclic ester or amide linkage, it is preferred that the resulting ring is 5-7 membered. It is further preferred that the group A or B which does not form the ester or amide linkage is CH2.
  • Preferably n=0.
  • In one aspect, CR6R7 is CH2, CHOH, CH(NH2), C(Me)(OH) or CH(Me) and CR8R9 is CH2.
  • When A is CH(OH) the R-stereochemistry is preferred.
  • Preferably A is NH, NCH3, CH2, CHOH, CH(NH2), C(Me)(OH) or CH(Me).
  • Preferably B is CH2 or CO.
  • Preferably A-B is CH2—CH2, CHOH—CH2, NR11—CH2 or NR11—CO.
  • Particularly preferred are those compounds where n=0, A and B are both CH2, A is NH and B is CO, or A is CHOH and B is CH2, when more preferably A is the R-isomer of CHOH.
  • Preferably R11 is hydrogen or (C1-4)alkyl e.g. methyl, more preferably hydrogen.
  • U is most preferably CH2.
  • Preferably R5 is an aromatic heterocyclic ring (A) having 8-11 ring atoms including 2-4 heteroatoms of which at least one is N or NR13 in which preferably Y2 contains 2-3 heteroatoms, one of which is S and 1-2 are N, with one N bonded to X3.
  • Alternatively and preferably the heterocyclic ring (A) has ring (a) aromatic selected from optionally substituted benzo and pyrido and ring (b) non aromatic and Y2 has 3-5 atoms, more preferably 4 atoms, including a heteroatom bonded to X5 selected from O, S or NR3, where R13 is other than hydrogen, and NHCO bonded via N to X3, or O bonded to X3. The ring (a) preferably contains aromatic nitrogen, and more preferably ring (a) is pyridine. Examples of rings (A) include optionally substituted:
  • (a) and (b) Aromatic
  • 1H-pyrrolo[2,3-b]-pyridin-2-yl, 1H-pyrrolo[3,2-b]-pyridin-2-yl, 3H-imidazo[4,5-b]-pyrid-2-yl, 3H-quinazolin-4-one-2-yl, benzimidazol-2-yl, benzo[1,2,3]-thiadiazol-5-yl, benzo[1,2,5]-oxadiazol-5-yl, benzofur-2-yl, benzothiazol-2-yl, benzo[b]thiophen-2-yl, benzoxazol-2-yl, chromen-4-one-3-yl, imidazo[1,2-a]pyridin-2-yl, imidazo-[1,2-a]-pyrimidin-2-yl, indol-2-yl, indol-6-yl, isoquinolin-3-yl, [1,8]-naphthyridine-3-yl, oxazolo[4,5-b]-pyridin-2-yl, quinolin-2-yl, quinolin-3-yl, quinoxalin-2-yl, indan-2-yl, naphthalen-2-yl, 1,3-dioxo-isoindol-2-yl, benzimidazol-2-yl, benzothiophen-2-yl, 1H-benzotriazol-5-yl, 1H-indol-5-yl, 3H-benzooxazol-2-one-6-yl, 3H-benzooxazol-2-thione-6-yl, 3H-benzothiazol-2-one-5-yl, 3H-quinazolin-4-one-2-yl, 3H-quinazolin-4-one-6-yl, 4-oxo-4H-pyrido[1,2-a]pyrimidin-3-yl, benzo[1,2,3]thiadiazol-6-yl, benzo[1,2,5]thiadiazol-5-yl, benzo[1,4]oxazin-2-one-3-yl, benzothiazol-5-yl, benzothiazol-6-yl, cinnolin-3-yl, imidazo[1,2-a]pyridazin-2-yl, imidazo[1,2-b]pyridazin-2-yl, pyrazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-2-yl, pyrazolo[1,5-a]pyridin-2-yl, pyrazolo[1,5-a]pyrimidin-6-yl, pyrazolo[5,1-c][1,2,4]triazin-3-yl, pyrido[1,2-a]pyrimdin-4-one-2-yl, pyrido[1,2-a]pyrimidin-4-one-3-yl, quinazolin-2-yl, quinoxalin-6-yl, thiazolo[3,2-a]pyrimidin-5-one-7-yl, thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-2-yl, thieno[3,2-b]pyridin-6-yl, thiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-6-yl, 4-oxo-4H-pyrido[1,2-a]pyrimidin-2-yl, 1-oxo-1,2-dihydro-isoquinolin-3-yl, thiazolo[4,5-b]pyridin-5-yl, [1,2,3]thiadiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-6-yl, 2H-isoquinolin-1-one-3-yl
  • (a) Is Non Aromatic
  • (2S)-2,3-dihydro-1H-indol-2-yl, (2S)-2,3-dihydro-benzo[1,4]dioxine-2-yl, 3-(R,S)-3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[1,4]thiazin-3-yl, 3-(R)-2,3-dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl, 3-(S)-2,3-dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-b]pyridin-3-yl, 2,3-dihydro-benzo[1,4]dioxan-2-yl, 3-substituted-3H-quinazolin-4-one-2-yl,
  • (b) Is Non Aromatic
  • 1,1,3-trioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydrol l6-benzo[1,4]thiazin-6-yl, benzo[1,3]dioxol-5-yl, 2,3-dihydro-benzo[1,4]dioxin-6-yl, 2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-benzooxazol-6-yl, 3-substituted-3H-benzooxazol-2-one-6-yl, 3-substituted-3H-benzooxazole-2-thione-6-yl, 3-substituted-3H-benzothiazol-2-one-6-yl, 4H-benzo[1,4]oxazin-3-one-6-yl (3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[1,4]oxazin-6-yl), 4H-benzo[1,4]thiazin-3-one-6-yl (3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[1,4]thiazin-6-yl), 4H-benzo[1,4]oxazin-3-one-7-yl, 4-oxo-2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-benzo[b][1,4]thiazepine-7-yl, 5-oxo-2,3-dihydro-5H-thiazolo[3,2-a]pyrimidin-6-yl, benzo[1,3]dioxol-5-yl, 1H-pyrido[2,3-b][1,4]thiazin-2-one-7-yl (2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-1H-pyrido[2,3-b]thiazin-7-yl), 2,3-dihydro-1H-pyrido[2,3-b][1,4]thiazin-7-yl, 2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-1H-pyrido[3,4-b]thiazin-7-yl, 2,3-dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-b]pyridin-6-yl, 2,3-dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-yl, 2,3-dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-b]pyridin-7-yl, 3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[1,4]oxazin-6-yl, 3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[1,4]thiazin-6-yl, 3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]oxazin-6-yl, 3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-6-yl, 3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-6-yl, 3,4-dihydro-1H-quinolin-2-one-7-yl, 3,4-dihydro-1H-quinoxalin-2-one-7-yl, 6,7-dihydro-4H-pyrazolo[1,5-a]pyrimidin-5-one-2-yl, 5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-[1,8]naphthyridin-2-yl, 2-oxo-3,4-dihydro-1H-[1,8]naphthyridin-6-yl, 6-oxo-6,7-dihydro-5H-8-thia-1,2,5-triaza-naphthalen-3-yl, 2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-1H-pyrido[3,4-b][1,4]oxazin-7-yl, 2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-1H-pyrido[2,3-b][1,4]oxazin-7-yl, 6,7-dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-d]pyrimidin-2-yl.
  • R13 is preferably H if in ring (a) or in addition (C1-4)alkyl such as methyl or isopropyl when in ring (b). More preferably, in ring (b) R13 is H when NR13 is bonded to X3 and (C1-4)alkyl when NR13 is bonded to X5.
  • R14 and R15 are preferably independently selected from hydrogen, halo, hydroxy, (C1-4) alkyl, (C1-4)alkoxy, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, cyano, aryl(C1-4)alkoxy and (C1-4)alkylsulphonyl. More preferably R15 is hydrogen.
  • More preferably each R14 is selected from hydrogen, chloro, fluoro, hydroxy, methyl, methoxy, trifluoromethoxy, benzyloxy, nitro, cyano and methylsulphonyl. Most preferably R14 is selected from hydrogen, fluorine or nitro.
  • Most preferably R14 and R15 are each H.
  • Most preferred groups R5 include:
    • [1,2,3]thiadiazolo[5,4-b]pyridin-6-yl
    • 1H-Pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridin-2-yl
    • 2,3-Dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-b]pyridin-6-yl
    • 2,3-Dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-b]pyridin-7-yl
    • 2,3-Dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-yl
    • 2,3-dihydro-benzo[1,4]dioxin-6-yl
    • 2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-1H-pyrido[2,3-b][1,4]oxazin-7-yl
    • 2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-1H-pyrido[2,3-b][1,4]thiazin-7-yl
    • 3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[1,4]oxazin-6-yl
    • 3-Methyl-2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-benzooxazol-6-yl
    • 3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[1,4]oxazin-6-yl
    • 3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]oxazin-6-yl
    • 3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[1,4]thiazin-6-yl (4H-benzo[1,4]thiazin-3-one-6-yl)
    • 4-oxo-4H-pyrido[1,2-a]pyrimidin-2-yl
    • 6-nitro-benzo[1,3]dioxol-5-yl
    • 7-fluoro-3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-benzo[1,4]oxazin-6-yl
    • 8-Hydroxy-1-oxo-1,2-dihydro-isoquinolin-3-yl
    • 8-hydroxyquinolin-2-yl
    • benzo[1,2,3]thiadiazol-5-yl
    • benzo[1,2,5]thiadiazol-5-yl
    • benzothiazol-5-yl
    • thiazolo-[5,4-b]pyridin-6-yl
    • 3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-6-yl
    • 7-chloro-3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-6-yl
    • 7-fluoro-3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-6-yl
    • 2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-1H-pyrido[3,4-b][1,4]thiazin-7-yl
      especially
    • 3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]oxazin-6-yl
    • 3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-6-yl
    • 7-chloro-3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-6-yl
    • 7-fluoro-3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-6-yl
    • 2,3-dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-yl.
  • When used herein, the term “alkyl” includes groups having straight and branched chains, for instance, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl, sec-butyl, t-butyl, pentyl and hexyl. The term ‘alkenyl’ should be interpreted accordingly.
  • Halo or halogen includes fluoro, chloro, bromo and iodo.
  • Haloalkyl moieties include 1-3 halogen atoms.
  • Unless otherwise defined, the term “heterocyclic” as used herein includes optionally substituted aromatic and non-aromatic, single and fused, rings suitably containing up to four hetero-atoms in each ring selected from oxygen, nitrogen and sulphur, which rings may be unsubstituted or C-substituted by, for example, up to three groups selected from (C1-4)alkylthio; halo; carboxy(C1-4)alkyl; halo(C1-4)alkoxy; halo(C1-4)alkyl; (C1-4)alkyl; (C2-4)alkenyl; (C1-4)alkoxycarbonyl; formyl; (C1-4)alkylcarbonyl; (C2-4)alkenyloxycarbonyl; (C2-4)alkenylcarbonyl; (C1-4)alkylcarbonyloxy; (C1-4)alkoxycarbonyl(C1-4)alkyl; hydroxy; hydroxy(C1-4)alkyl; mercapto(C1-4)alkyl; (C1-4)alkoxy; nitro; cyano, carboxy; amino or aminocarbonyl optionally substituted as for corresponding substituents in R3; (C1-4)alkylsulphonyl; (C2-4)alkenylsulphonyl; or aminosulphonyl wherein the amino group is optionally substituted by (C1-4)alkyl or (C2-4)alkenyl; optionally substituted aryl, aryl(C1-4)alkyl or aryl(C1-4)alkoxy and oxo groups.
  • Each heterocyclic ring suitably has from 4 to 7, preferably 5 or 6, ring atoms. A fused heterocyclic ring system may include carbocyclic rings and need include only one heterocyclic ring.
  • Compounds within the invention containing a heterocyclyl group may occur in two or more tautometric forms depending on the nature of the heterocyclyl group; all such tautomeric forms are included within the scope of the invention.
  • Where an amino group forms part of a single or fused non-aromatic heterocyclic ring as defined above suitable optional substituents in such substituted amino groups include H; trifluoromethyl; (C1-4)alkyl optionally substituted by hydroxy, (C1-6)alkoxy, (C1-6)alkylthio, halo or trifluoromethyl; (C2-4)alkenyl; aryl; aryl (C1-4)alkyl; (C1-4)alkoxycarbonyl; (C1-4)alkylcarbonyl; formyl; (C1-6)alkylsulphonyl; or aminocarbonyl wherein the amino group is optionally substituted by (C1-4)alkoxycarbonyl, (C1-4)alkylcarbonyl, (C2-4)alkenyloxycarbonyl, (C2-4)alkenylcarbonyl, (C1-4)alkyl or (C2-4)alkenyl and optionally further substituted by (C1-4)alkyl or (C2-4)alkenyl.
  • When used herein the term “aryl”, includes optionally substituted phenyl and naphthyl.
  • Aryl groups may be optionally substituted with up to five, preferably up to three, groups selected from (C1-4)alkylthio; halo; carboxy(C1-4)alkyl; halo(C1-4)alkoxy; halo(C1-4)alkyl; (C1-4)alkyl; (C2-4)alkenyl; (C1-4)alkoxycarbonyl; formyl; (C1-4)alkylcarbonyl; (C2-4)alkenyloxycarbonyl; (C2-4)alkenylcarbonyl; (C1-4)alkylcarbonyloxy; (C1-4)alkoxycarbonyl(C1-4)alkyl; hydroxy; hydroxy(C1-4)alkyl; mercapto(C1-4)alkyl; (C1-4)alkoxy; nitro; cyano; carboxy; amino or aminocarbonyl optionally substituted as for corresponding substituents in R3; (C1-4)alkylsulphonyl; (C2-4)alkenylsulphonyl; or aminosulphonyl wherein the amino group is optionally substituted by (C1-4)alkyl or (C2-4)alkenyl; phenyl, phenyl(C1-4)alkyl or phenyl(C1-4)alkoxy
  • The term “acyl” includes formyl and (C1-6)alkylcarbonyl group.
  • Some of the compounds of this invention may be crystallised or recrystallised from solvents such as aqueous and organic solvents. In such cases solvates may be formed. This invention includes within its scope stoichiometric solvates including hydrates as well as compounds containing variable amounts of water that may be produced by processes such as lyophilisation.
  • Since the compounds of formula (I) are intended for use in pharmaceutical compositions it will readily be understood that they are each preferably provided in substantially pure form, for example at least 60% pure, more suitably at least 75% pure and preferably at least 85%, especially at least 98% pure (% are on a weight for weight basis). Impure preparations of the compounds may be used for preparing the more pure forms used in the pharmaceutical compositions; these less pure preparations of the compounds should contain at least 1%, more suitably at least 5% and preferably from 10 to 59% of a compound of the formula (I) or pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof.
  • Particular compounds according to the invention include those mentioned in the examples and their pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives of the above-mentioned compounds of formula (I) include the free base form or their acid addition or quaternary ammonium salts, for example their salts with mineral acids e.g. hydrochloric, hydrobromic, sulphuric nitric or phosphoric acids, or organic acids, e.g. acetic, fumaric, succinic, maleic, citric, benzoic, p-toluenesulphonic, methanesulphonic, naphthalenesulphonic acid or tartaric acids. Compounds of formula (I) may also be prepared as the N-oxide. Compounds of formula (I) having a free carboxy group may also be prepared as an in vivo hydrolysable ester. The invention extends to all such derivatives.
  • Examples of suitable pharmaceutically acceptable in vivo hydrolysable ester-forming groups include those forming esters which break down readily in the human body to leave the parent acid or its salt. Suitable groups of this type include those of part formulae (i), (ii), (iii), (iv) and (v):
    Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00004
  • wherein Ra is hydrogen, (C1-6) alkyl, (C3-7) cycloalkyl, methyl, or phenyl, Rb is (C1-6) alkyl, (C1-6) alkoxy, phenyl, benzyl, (C3-7) cycloalkyl, (C3-7) cycloalkyloxy, (C1-6) alkyl (C3-7) cycloalkyl, 1-amino (C1-6) alkyl, or 1-(C1-6 alkyl)amino (C1-6) alkyl; or Ra and Rb together form a 1,2-phenylene group optionally substituted by one or two methoxy groups; Rc represents (C1-6) alkylene optionally substituted with a methyl or ethyl group and Rd and Re independently represent (C1-6) alkyl; Rf represents (C1-6) alkyl; Rg represents hydrogen or phenyl optionally substituted by up to three groups selected from halogen, (C1-6) alkyl, or (C1-6) alkoxy; Q is oxygen or NH; Rh is hydrogen or (C1-6) alkyl; Ri is hydrogen, (C1-6) alkyl optionally substituted by halogen, (C2-6) alkenyl, (C1-6) alkoxycarbonyl, aryl or heteroaryl; or Rh and Ri together form (C1-6) alkylene; Rj represents hydrogen, (C1-6) alkyl or (C1-6) alkoxycarbonyl; and Rk represents (C1-8) alkyl, (C1-8) alkoxy, (C1-6) alkoxy(C1-6)alkoxy or aryl.
  • Examples of suitable in vivo hydrolysable ester groups include, for example, acyloxy(C1-6)alkyl groups such as acetoxymethyl, pivaloyloxymethyl, α-acetoxyethyl, α-pivaloyloxyethyl, 1-(cyclohexylcarbonyloxy)prop-1-yl, and (1-aminoethyl)carbonyloxymethyl; (C1-6)alkoxycarbonyloxy(C1-6)alkyl groups, such as ethoxycarbonyloxymethyl, α-ethoxycarbonyloxyethyl and propoxycarbonyloxyethyl; di(C1-6)alkylamino(C1-6)alkyl especially di(C1-4)alkylamino(C1-4)alkyl groups such as dimethylaminomethyl, dimethylaminoethyl, diethylaminomethyl or diethylaminoethyl; 2-((C1-6)alkoxycarbonyl)-2-(C2-6)alkenyl groups such as 2-(isobutoxycarbonyl)pent-2-enyl and 2-(ethoxycarbonyl)but-2-enyl; lactone groups such as phthalidyl and dimethoxyphthalidyl.
  • A further suitable pharmaceutically acceptable in vivo hydrolysable ester-forming group is that of the formula:
    Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00005
  • wherein Rk is hydrogen, C1-6 alkyl or phenyl.
  • R is preferably hydrogen.
  • Compounds of formula (I) may also be prepared as the corresponding N-oxides.
  • Certain of the compounds of formula (I) may exist in the form of optical isomers, e.g. diastereoisomers and mixtures of isomers in all ratios, e.g. racemic mixtures. The invention includes all such forms, in particular the pure isomeric forms. For example the invention includes compound in which an A-B group CH(OH)—CH2 is in either isomeric configuration, the R-isomer is preferred. The different isomeric forms may be separated or resolved one from the other by conventional methods, or any given isomer may be obtained by conventional synthetic methods or by stereospecific or asymmetric syntheses.
  • In a further aspect of the invention there is provided a process for preparing compounds of formula (I), and pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, which process comprises reacting a compound of formula (IV) with a compound of formula (V):
    Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00006
    wherein n is as defined in formula (1); Z1′, Z2′, Z3′, R1′, and R3′ are Z1, Z2, Z3, R1, and R3 as defined in formula (1) or groups convertible thereto; Z4 and Z5 are as defined in formula (I);
    • Q1 is NR2′R4′ or a group convertible thereto wherein R2′ and R4′ are R2 and R4 as defined in formula (I) or groups convertible thereto and Q2 is H or R3′ or Q1 and Q2 together form an optionally protected oxo group;
    • (i) X is A′-COW, Y is H and n is 0;
    • (ii) X is CR6═CR8R9, Y is H and n is 0;
    • (iii) X is oxirane, Y is H and n is 0;
    • (iv) X is N═C═O and Y is H and n is 0;
    • (v) one of X and Y is CO2Ry and the other is CH2CO2Rx;
    • (vi) X is CHR6R7 and Y is C(═O)R9;
    • (vii) X is CR7═PRz 3 and Y is C(═O)R9 and n=1;
    • (viii) X is C(═O)R7 and Y is CR9═PRz 3 and n=1;
    • (ix) Y is COW and X is NHR11′, NCO or NR11′ COW and n=0 or 1 or when n=1 X is COW and Y is NHR11′, NCO or NR11′COW;
    • (x) X is NHR11′ and Y is C(═O)R8 and n=1;
    • (xi) X is NHR11′ and Y is CR8R9W and n=1;
    • (xii) X is NR11′COCH2W or NR11′SO2CH2W and Y is H and n=0;
    • (xiii) X is CR6R7SO2W and Y is H and n=0;
    • (xiv) X is W or OH and Y is CH2OH and n is 1;
    • (xv) X is NHR11′ and Y is SO2W or X is NR11′SO2W and Y is H, and n is 0;
    • (xvi) X is W and Y is CONHR11′;
    • (xvii) X is —CH═CH2 and Y is H and n=0;
    • (xviii) X is CH3 and Y is H and n=0 together with formaldehyde in which W is a leaving group, e.g. halo, methanesulphonyloxy, trifluoromethanesulphonyloxy or imidazolyl; Rx and Ry are (C1-6)alkyl; Rz is aryl or (C1-6)alkyl; A′ and NR11′ are A and NR11 as defined in formula (I), or groups convertible thereto; and oxirane is:
      Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00007
      wherein R6, R8 and R9 are as defined in formula (I);
      and thereafter optionally or as necessary converting Q1 and Q2 to NR2′R4′; converting A′, Z1′, Z2′, Z3′, R1′, R2′, R3′, R4′ and NR11′; to A, Z1, Z2, Z3, R1, R2, R3, R4 and NR11; converting A-B to other A-B, interconverting R1, R2, R3 and/or R4, and/or forming a pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof.
  • Process variant (i) initially produces compounds of formula (I) wherein A-B is A′-CO.
  • Process variant (ii) initially produces compounds of formula (I) wherein A-B is CHR6—CR8R9.
  • Process variant (iii) initially produces compounds of formula (I) wherein A-B is CR6(OH)—CR8R9.
  • Process variant (iv) initially produces compounds of formula (I) where A-B is NH—CO.
  • Process variant (v) initially produces compounds of formula (I) wherein A-B is CO—CH2 or CH2—CO.
  • Process variant (vi) initially produces compounds of formula (I) wherein A-B is CR6R7—CR9OH.
  • Process variant (vii) and (viii) initially produce compounds of formula (I) wherein A-B is CR7═CR9.
  • Process variant (ix) initially produces compounds of formula (I) where A-B is CO—NR11 or NR11—CO.
  • Process variant (x) initially produces compounds of formula (I) wherein A-B is NR11—CHR8.
  • Process variant (xi) initially produces compounds of formula (I) wherein A-B is NR11—CR8R9.
  • Process variant (xii) initially produces compounds of formula (I) where A-B is NR11′—CO or NR11′—SO2 and n=1.
  • Process variant (xiii) initially produces compounds of formula (I) where A-B is CR6R7—SO2.
  • Process variant (xiv) initially produces compounds of formula (I) wherein A-B is O—CH2.
  • Process variant (xv) initially produces compounds where AB is NR11SO2.
  • Process variant (xvi) initially produces compounds of formula (I) where A-B is NR11′—CO.
  • Process variants (xvii) and (xviii) initially produce compounds of formula (I) where A-B is —CH2—CH2—.
  • In process variants (i) and (ix) the reaction is a standard amide or urea formation reaction involving e.g.:
    • 1. Activation of a carboxylic acid (e.g. to an acid chloride, mixed anhydride, active ester, O-acyl-isourea or other species), and treatment with an amine (Ogliaruso, M. A.; Wolfe, J. F. in The Chemistry of Functional Groups (Ed. Patai, S.) Suppl. B: The Chemistry of Acid Derivatives, Pt. 1 (John Wiley and Sons, 1979), pp 442-8; Beckwith, A. L. J. in The Chemistry of Functional Groups (Ed. Patai, S.) Suppl. B: The Chemistry of Amides (Ed. Zabricky, J.) (John Wiley and Sons, 1970), p 73 ff. The acid and amine are preferably reacted in the presence of an activating agent such as 1-(dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (EDC) or 1-hydroxybenzotriazole (HOBT) or O-(7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,N′,N′-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (HATU); or
    • 2. The specific methods of:
    • a. in situ conversion of an acid into the amine component by a modified Curtius reaction procedure (Shioiri, T., Murata, M., Harnada, Y., Chem. Pharm. Bull. 1987, 35, 2698)
    • b. in situ conversion of the acid component into the acid chloride under neutral conditions (Villeneuve, G. B.; Chan, T. H., Tetrahedron. Lett. 1997, 38, 6489).
  • A′ may be, for example, protected hydroxymethylene.
  • The process variant (ii) is a standard addition reaction using methods well known to those skilled in the art. The process is preferably carried out in a polar organic solvent e.g. acetonitrile in the presence of an organic base e.g. triethylamine.
  • In process variant (iii) the coupling may be effected in a suitable solvent such as acetonitrile or dimethylformamide at room temperature in the presence of one equivalent of lithium perchlorate as catalyst (general method of J. E. Chateauneuf et al, J. Org. Chem., 56, 5939-5942, 1991) or more preferably with ytterbium triflate in dichloromethane. In some cases an elevated temperature such as 40-70° C. may be beneficial. Alternatively, the piperidine may be treated with a base, such as one equivalent of butyl lithium, and the resulting salt reacted with the oxirane in an inert solvent such as tetrahydrofuran, preferably at an elevated temperature such as 80° C. Use of a chiral epoxide will afford single diastereomers. Alternatively, mixtures of diastereomers may be separated by preparative HPLC or by conventional resolution through crystallisation of salts formed from chiral acids.
  • The process variant (iv) is a standard urea formation reaction from the reaction of an isocyanate with an amine and is conducted by methods well known to those skilled in the art (for example see March, J; Advanced Organic Chemistry, Edition 3 (John Wiley and Sons, 1985), p 802-3). The process is preferably carried out in a polar solvent such as N,N-dimethylformamide.
  • In process variant (v) the process is two step: firstly a condensation using a base, preferably sodium hydride or alkoxide, sodamide, alkyl lithium or lithium dialkylamide, preferably in an aprotic solvent e.g. ether, THF or benzene; secondly, hydrolysis using an inorganic acid, preferably HCl in aqueous organic solvent at 0-100° C. Analogous routes are described in DE330945, EP31753, EP53964 and H. Sargent, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 68, 2688-2692 (1946). Similar Claisen methodology is described in Soszko et. al., Pr. Kom. Mat. Przyr. Poznan. Tow. Przyj. Nauk., (1962), 10, 15.
  • In process variant (vi) the reaction is carried out in the presence of a base, preferably organometallic or metal hydride e.g. NaH, lithium diisopropylamide or NaOEt, preferably in an aprotic solvent, preferably THF, ether or benzene at −78 to 25° C. (analogous process in Gutswiller et al. (1978) J. Am. Chem. Soc. 100, 576).
  • In process variants (vii) and (viii) if a base is used it is preferably NaH, KH, an alkyl lithium e.g. BuLi, a metal alkoxide e.g. NaOEt, sodamide or lithium dialkylamide e.g. di-isopropylamide. An analogous method is described in U.S. Pat. No. 3,989,691 and M. Gates et. al. (1970) J. Amer. Chem. Soc., 92, 205, as well as Taylor et al. (1972) JACS 94, 6218.
  • In process variant (x) where Y is CHO the reaction is a standard reductive alkylation using, e.g., sodium borohydride or sodium triacetoxyborohydride (Gribble, G. W. in Encyclopedia of Reagents for Organic Synthesis (Ed. Paquette, L. A.) (John Wiley and Sons, 1995), p 4649).
  • The process variant (xi) is a standard alkylation reaction well known to those skilled in the art, for example where an alcohol or amine is treated with an alkyl halide in the presence of a base (for example see March, J; Advanced Organic Chemistry, Edition 3 (John Wiley and Sons, 1985), p 364-366 and p 342-343). The process is preferably carried out in a polar solvent such as N,N-dimethylformamide
  • In process variant (xii) the reaction is an alkylation, examples of which are described in J. Med. chem. (1979) 22(10) 1171-6. The compound of formula (IV) may be prepared from the corresponding compound where X is NHR11′ by acylation with an appropriate derivative of the acid WCH2COOH such as the acid chloride or sulphonation with an appropriate derivative of the sulphonic acid WCH2SO3H such as the sulphonyl chloride.
  • In process variant (xiii) the reaction is a standard sulphonamide formation reaction well known to those skilled in the art. This may be e.g. the reaction of a sulphonyl halide with an amine.
  • In process variant (xiv) where X is W such as halogen, methanesulphonyloxy or trifluoromethanesulphonyloxy, the hydroxy group in Y is preferably converted to an OM group where M is an alkali metal by treatment of an alcohol with a base. The base is preferably inorganic such as NaH, lithium diisopropylamide or sodium. Where X is OH, the hydroxy group in Y is activated under Mitsunobu conditions (Fletcher et al. J Chem Soc. (1995), 623). Alternatively the X═O and Y═CH2OH groups can be reacted directly by activation with 1,3-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC) (Chem. Berichte 1962, 95, 2997 or Angewante Chemie 1963 75, 377).
  • In process variant (xv) the reaction is conducted in the presence of an organic base such as triethylamine or pyridine such as described by Fuhrman et.al., J. Amer. Chem. Soc.; 67, 1245, 1945. The X═NR11′SO2W or Y═SO2W intermediates can be formed from the requisite amine e.g. by reaction with SO2Cl2 analogously to the procedure described by the same authors Fuhrman et.al., J. Amer. Chem. Soc.; 67, 1245, 1945.
  • In process variant (xvi) the leaving group W is preferably chloro, bromo or iodo or trifluoromethylsulphonyloxy and the reaction is the palladium catalysed process known as the “Buchwald” reaction (J. Yin and S. L. Buchwald, Org. Lett., 2000, 2, 1101).
  • In process variant (xvii) the reaction is the addition of an amine to an olefin which is susceptible to nucleophilic attack.
  • In process variant (xviii) the reaction is a three component condensation reaction carried out under mildly acidic conditions.
  • Reduction of a carbonyl group A or B to CHOH can be readily accomplished using reducing agents well known to those skilled in the art, e.g. sodium borohydride in aqueous ethanol or lithium aluminium hydride in ethereal solution. This is analogous to methods described in EP53964, U.S. Pat. No. 384,556 and J. Gutzwiller et al, J. Amer. Chem. Soc., 1978, 100, 576.
  • The carbonyl group A or B may be reduced to CH2 by treatment with a reducing agent such as hydrazine in ethylene glycol, at e.g. 130-160° C., in the presence of potassium hydroxide.
  • Reaction of a carbonyl group A or B with an organometallic reagent yields a group where R6 or R8 is OH and R7 or R9 is alkyl.
  • A hydroxy group on A or B may be oxidised to a carbonyl group by oxidants well known to those skilled in the art, for example, manganese dioxide, pyridinium chlorochromate or pyridinium dichromate.
  • A hydroxyalkyl A-B group CHR7CR9OH or CR7(OH)CHR9 may be dehydrated to give the group CR7═CR9 by treatment with an acid anhydride such as acetic anhydride.
  • Methods for conversion of CR7═CR9 by reduction to CHR7CHR9 are well known to those skilled in the art, for example using hydrogenation over palladium on carbon as catalyst. Methods for conversion of CR7═CR9 to give the A-B group CR7(OH)CHR9 or CHR7CR9OH are well known to those skilled in the art for example by epoxidation and subsequent reduction by metal hydrides, hydration, hydroboration or oxymercuration.
  • An amide carbonyl group may be reduced to the corresponding amine using a reducing agent such as lithium aluminium hydride.
  • A hydroxy group in A or B may be converted to azido by activation and displacement e.g. under Mitsunobu conditions using hydrazoic acid or by treatment with diphenylphosphorylazide and base, and the azido group in turn may be reduced to amino by hydrogenation.
  • An example of a group Q1 convertible to NR2 R4 is NR2′R4′ or halogen. Halogen may be displaced by an amine HNR2′R4′ by a conventional alkylation.
  • When Q1Q2 together form a protected oxo group this may be an acetal such as ethylenedioxy which can subsequently be removed by acid treatment to give a compound of formula (VI):
    Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00008
    wherein the variables are as described for formula (I)
  • The ketone of formula (VI) is reacted with an amine HNR2′R4′ by conventional reductive alkylation as described above for process variant (x).
  • Examples of groups Z1′, Z2′ and Z3′ convertible to Z1, Z2 and Z3 include CR1 or CR1′CR1a′ where R1′ and R1a′ are groups convertible to R1 and R1a. Z1′, Z2′ and Z3′ are preferably Z1, Z2 and Z3.
  • R1a′, R1′ and R2′ are preferably R1a, R1 and R2. R2′ is preferably hydrogen. R3′ is R3 or more preferably hydrogen, vinyl, alkoxycarbonyl or carboxy. R4 is R4 or more preferably H or an N-protecting group such as t-butoxycarbonyl, benzyloxycarbonyl or 9-fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl.
  • Conversions of R1′, R1a′, R2′, R3 and R4 and interconversions of R1, R1a, R2, R3 and R4 are conventional. In compounds which contain an optionally protected hydroxy group, suitable conventional hydroxy protecting groups which may be removed without disrupting the remainder of the molecule include acyl and alkylsilyl groups. N-protecting groups are removed by conventional methods.
  • For example R1′ methoxy is convertible to R1′ hydroxy by treatment with lithium and diphenylphosphine (general method described in Ireland et al, J. Amer. Chem. Soc., 1973, 7829) or HBr. Alkylation of the hydroxy group with a suitable alkyl derivative bearing a leaving group such as halide and a protected amino, piperidyl, amidino or guanidino group or group convertible thereto, yields, after conversion/deprotection, R1 alkoxy substituted by optionally N-substituted amino, piperidyl, guanidino or amidino.
  • R3 alkenyl is convertible to hydroxyalkyl by hydroboration using a suitable reagent such as 9-borabicyclo[3.3.1]nonane, epoxidation and reduction or oxymercuration.
  • R3 1,2-dihydroxyalkyl can be prepared from R3′ alkenyl using osmium tetroxide or other reagents well known to those skilled in the art (see Advanced Organic Chemistry, Ed. March, J., John Wiley and Sons, 1985, p 732-737 and refs. cited therein) or epoxidation followed by hydrolysis (see Advanced Organic Chemistry, Ed. March, J. John Wiley and Sons, 1985, p 332, 333 and refs. cited therein).
  • R3 vinyl can be chain extended by standard homologation, e.g. by conversion to hydroxyethyl followed by oxidation to the aldehyde, which is then subjected to a Wittig reaction.
  • Opening an epoxide-containing R3′ group with cyanide anion yields a CH(OH)—CH2CN group.
  • Opening an epoxide-containing R3′ group with azide anion yields an azide derivative which can be reduced to the amine. Conversion of the amine to a carbamate is followed by ring closure with base to give the 2-oxo-oxazolidinyl containing R3 group.
  • Substituted 2-oxo-oxazolidinyl containing R3 groups may be prepared from the corresponding aldehyde by conventional reaction with a glycine anion equivalent, followed by cyclisation of the resulting amino alcohol (M. Grauert et al, Ann. Chem., 1985, 1817; Rozenberg et al, Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 1994, 33(1), 91). The resulting 2-oxo-oxazolidinyl group contains a carboxy group which can be converted to other R10 groups by standard procedures.
  • Carboxy groups within R3 may be prepared by Jones' oxidation of the corresponding alcohols CH2OH using chromic acid and sulphuric acid in water/methanol (E. R. H. Jones et al, J. Chem. Soc., 1946, 39). Other oxidising agents may be used for this transformation such as sodium periodate catalysed by ruthenium trichloride (G. F. Tutwiler et al, J. Med. Chem., 1987, 30(6), 1094), chromium trioxide-pyridine (G. Just et al, Synth. Commun., 1979, 9(7), 613), potassium permanganate (D. E. Reedich et al, J. Org. Chem., 1985, 50(19), 3535), and pyridinium chlorochromate (D. Askin et al, Tetrahedron Lett., 1988, 29(3), 277).
  • The carboxy group may alternatively be formed in a two stage process, with an initial oxidation of the alcohol to the corresponding aldehyde using for instance dimethyl sulphoxide activated with oxalyl chloride (N. Cohen et al, J. Am. Chem. Soc., 1983, 105, 3661) or dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (R. M. Wengler, Angew. Chim. Int. Ed. Eng., 1985, 24(2), 77), or oxidation with tetrapropylammonium perruthenate (Ley et al, J. Chem. Soc. Chem Commun., 1987, 1625). The aldehyde may then be separately oxidised to the corresponding acid using oxidising agents such as silver (II) oxide (R. Grigg et al, J. Chem. Soc. Perkin 1, 1983, 1929), potassium permanganate (A. Zurcher, Helv. Chim. Acta., 1987, 70 (7), 1937), sodium periodate catalysed by ruthenium trichloride (T. Sakata et al, Bull. Chem. Soc. Jpn., 1988, 61(6), 2025), pyridinium chlorochromate (R. S. Reddy et al, Synth. Commun., 1988, 18(51), 545) or chromium trioxide (R. M. Coates et al, J. Am. Chem. Soc., 1982, 104, 2198).
  • An R3 CO2H group may also be prepared from oxidative cleavage of the corresponding diol, CH(OH)CH2OH, using sodium periodate catalysed by ruthenium trichloride with an acetonitrile-carbontetrachloride-water solvent system (V. S. Martin et al, Tetrahedron Letters, 1988, 29(22), 2701).
  • Other routes to the synthesis of carboxy groups within R3 are well known to those skilled in the art.
  • R3 groups containing a cyano or carboxy group may also be prepared by conversion of an alcohol to a suitable leaving group such as the corresponding tosylate by reaction with para-toluenesulphonyl chloride (M. R. Bell, J. Med. Chem., 1970, 13, 389), or the iodide using triphenylphosphine, iodine, and imidazole (G. Lange, Synth. Commun., 1990, 20, 1473). The second stage is the displacement of the leaving group with cyanide anion (L. A. Paquette et al, J. Org. Chem., 1979, 44(25). 4603; P. A. Grieco et al, J. Org. Chem., 1988, 53(16), 3658. Finally acidic hydrolysis of the nitrile group gives the desired acids (H. Rosemeyer et al, Heterocycles, 1985, 23 (10), 2669). The hydrolysis may also be carried out with base e.g. potassium hydroxide (H. Rapoport, J. Org. Chem., 1958, 23, 248) or enzymatically (T. Beard et al, Tetrahedron Asymmetry, 1993, 4 (6), 1085).
  • R3 cis or trans hydroxy may be introduced by the methods of van Deale et al., Drug Development Research 8:225-232 (1986) or Heterocycles 39(1), 163-170 (1994). For trans hydroxy, a suitable method converts N-protected tetrahydropyridine to the epoxide by treatment with metachloroperbenzoic acid, followed by opening of the epoxide with a suitable amine NR2′R4′. R3′ hydroxy may then be converted to optionally substituted amino via preparation of the R3′ amino derivative by standard transformations such as a Mitsunobu reaction (for example as reviewed in Misunobu, Synthesisi, (1981), 1), for example with succinimide in the presence of diethylazodicarboxylate and triphenylphosphine to give the phthalimidoethylpiperidine. Removal of the phthaloyl group, for example by treatment with methylhydrazine, affords the R3′ amine. Optional substitution may then be introduced by standard methods for amine substitution well known to those skilled in the art.
  • R3 4-CF3 may be introduced by the following scheme I:
    Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00009
  • Commercially-available ethyl isonipecotate (I-1) reacts with an appropriate acylating agent, preferably di-tert-butyl dicarbonate, to afford the protected derivative I-2. Typical solvents for this reaction include CH2Cl2, THF, or DMF. The protecting group for the amine must be compatible with subsequent chemistry, and must be readily removable when desired. Methods for the protection of amines are well-known to those of skill in the art, and are described in standard reference volumes, such as Greene “Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis” (published by Wiley-Interscience). Alkylation of I-2 can be accomplished by reaction with an appropriate base, typically LDA or LiN(TMS)2, in an aprotic solvent, usually THF or DME, followed by trapping of the enolate with an appropriate electrophile, to afford I-3. Trifluoromethyl iodide (CF3I) or S-(trifluoromethyl)dibenzothiophenium trifluoromethanesulfonate are typically preferred as electrophilic trifluoromethylating reagents. The ethyl ester of I-3 is hydrolyzed using aqueous base, for example, LiOH in aqueous THF or NaOH in aqueous methanol or ethanol, and the intermediate carboxylate salt is acidified with a suitable acid, for instance TFA or HCl, to afford the carboxylic acid I-4. Curtius-type rearrangement of I-4 gives an intermediate isocyanate, which typically is not isolated, but rather is reacted in situ with an appropriate alcohol, such as benzyl alcohol, to give I-5. Diphenylphosphoryl azide in the presence of an amine base, generally triethylamine or diisopropylethylamine (Hunig's base), is the preferred reagent combination for effecting the Curtius-type rearrangement of I-4, but more classical conditions, such as formation of the acid chloride, reaction with azide anion, and warming of the acyl azide, can also be used. The benzyloxycarbonyl group in I-5 is removed by hydrogenolysis in the presence of a palladium catalyst, typically palladium on activated charcoal, in a suitable solvent, usually EtOH, MeOH, EtOAc, or mixtures thereof, to give amine I-6.
  • R3 2-CF3 may be introduced by the following scheme II:
    Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00010
  • Imine II-1, prepared in standard fashion by acid-catalyzed reaction of trifluoroacetaldehyde ethyl hemiacetal and (R)-(+)-α-methylbenzylamine, reacts with a silyloxydiene, for example 1-methoxy-3-(trimethylsilyloxy)-1,3-butadiene, in a Diels-Alder reaction to afford piperidone II-2. The reaction is conducted in a neutral solvent such as CH3CN, THF, or CH2Cl2, and oftentimes is mediated by a Lewis acid such as ZnCl2. Diastereomers are best separated at this point. The enone II-2 is reduced to the corresponding ketone II-3 by reaction with L-Selectride® in a suitable solvent, generally THF or DME, and the ketone is converted to an oxime derivative under standard conditions well-known to those of skill in the art. Reduction of the oxime derivative under standard conditions (LiAlH4) gives a mixture of diastereomeric amines from which the amine II-5 can be isolated. The amine is protected with an appropriate protecting group, preferably a tert-butyl carbamate (see Scheme I), to afford II-6. The α-methylbenzyl group of II-6 is removed by hydrogenolysis in the presence of a palladium catalyst, typically palladium on activated charcoal, in a suitable solvent, usually EtOH, MeOH, EtOAc, or mixtures thereof, to give amine II-7.
  • R3 3-CF3 may be introduced by the following scheme III:
    Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00011
  • The commercially-available ketone III-1 is converted to the corresponding silly enroll ether III-2 by reaction with a silylating reagent, such a trimethylsilyl chloride or trimethylsilyl triflate, in the presence of an amine base, typically triethylamine, in a suitable solvent, such as diethyl ether, THF, DMF, or mixtures thereof. The silly enroll ether III-2 reacts with an electrophilic trifluoromethylating reagent, such as trifluoromethyl iodide (CF3I) or more preferably S-(trifluoromethyl)dibenzothiophenium trifluoromethanesulfonate (see Tet. Lett. 1990, 31, 3579-3582)), in an appropriate solvent, such as THF, DMF, or mixtures thereof, to afford the α-trifluoromethyl ketone III-3. Ketone III-3 reacts with a chiral amine, for instance (R)-(+)-α-methylbenzylamine, under standard acidic catalysis, to afford the imine derivative III-4, which can be reduced to afford amine III-5. This type of reduction is typically conducted using sodium borohydride, sodium cyanoborohydride or sodium (triacetoxy)borohydride, in an appropriate solvent, such as EtOH, MeOH, THF, CH2Cl2, ClCH2CH2Cl, or mixtures thereof. Diastereomers are best separated at this point. The α-methylbenzyl group of III-5 is removed by hydrogenolysis in the presence of a palladium catalyst, typically palladium on activated charcoal, in a suitable solvent, usually EtOH, MeOH, EtOAc, or mixtures thereof, to give amine III-6.
  • R3 2-oxo may be introduced by the following scheme IV:
    Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00012
  • (R,S)-4-(Dibenzylamino)piperidin-2-one (IV-2, Homo-Freidinger Lactam, prepared from (R,S)-aspartic acid according to the procedure of Weber and Gmeiner, Synlett, 1998, 885-887) reacts with an appropriate epoxide, for instance 6-methoxy-4-(R)-oxiranylquinoline (VI-1) or 6-methoxy-4-(R)-oxiranyl-[1,5]naphthyridine, to afford the adduct IV-3. The reaction is mediated by a strong base, preferably sodium hydride, which is used to deprotonate IV-2, and is typically conducted in a polar, aprotic solvent, such as THF, DMF, or mixtures thereof. The benzyl groups in IV-3 are removed by hydrogenolysis in the presence of a palladium catalyst, typically palladium on activated charcoal, in a suitable solvent, usually EtOH, MeOH, EtOAc, or mixtures thereof, to give amine IV-4.
  • R3 3-F may be introduced by the following scheme V:
    Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00013
  • The enol ether (V-2), prepared from commercially-available N-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)piperidone (V-1) as described in Scheme III, reacts with an electrophilic fluorinating reagent, preferably Selectfluorin™ (1-chloromethyl-4-fluoro-1,4-diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane bis(tetrafluoroborate), in a neutral solvent such as CH3CN, to afford the α-fluoro ketone V-3. Reductive amination of V-3 with benzylamine according to the procedures described in Schemes I and III gives the expected 4-aminobenzyl-3-fluoro-N-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)piperidine derivatives V-4 and V-5 as a mixture of cis- and trans-isomers in an 8:1 ratio. These diastereomers are separable by chromatography on silica gel. The predominate cis-mixture of enantiomers is debenzylated by catalytic hydrogenation as described in Scheme II, to give the amino derivative V-6.
  • Other functional groups in R3 may be obtained by conventional conversions of hydroxy, carboxy or cyano groups.
  • Tetrazoles are conveniently prepared by reaction of sodium azide with the cyano group (e.g. F. Thomas et al, Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 1996, 6(6), 631; K. Kubo et al, J. Med. Chem., 1993, 36, 2182) or by reaction of azidotri-n-butyl stannane with the cyano group followed by acidic hydrolysis (P. L. Ornstein, J. Org. Chem., 1994, 59, 7682 and J. Med. Chem., 1996, 39 (11), 2219).
  • The 3-hydroxy-3-cyclobutene-1,2-dion-4-yl group (e.g. R. M. Soll, Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 1993, 3(4), 757 and W. A. Kinney, J. Med. Chem., 1992, 35(25), 4720) can be prepared by the following sequence:—(1) a compound where R3 is (CH2)nCHO (n=0, 1, 2) is treated with triethylamine, carbon tetrabromide/triphenylphosphine to give initially (CH2)nCH═CHBr; (2) dehydrobromination of this intermediate to give the corresponding bromoethyne derivative (CH2)nC≡CBr (for this 2 stage sequence see D. Grandjean et al, Tetrahedron Lett., 1994, 35(21), 3529); (3) palladium-catalysed coupling of the bromoethyne with 4-(1-methylethoxy)-3-(tri-n-butylstannyl)cyclobut-3-ene-1,2-dione (Liebeskind et al, J. Org. Chem., 1990, 55, 5359); (4) reduction of the ethyne moiety to —CH2CH2— under standard conditions of hydrogen and palladium on charcoal catalysis(see Howard et al, Tetrahedron, 1980, 36, 171); and finally (4) acidic hydrolysis of the methyl ethoxyester to generate the corresponding 3-hydroxy-3-cyclobutene-1,2-dione group (R. M. Soll, Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 1993, 3(4, 757).
  • The tetrazol-5-ylaminocarbonyl group may be prepared from the corresponding carboxylic acid and 2-aminotetrazole by dehydration with standard peptide coupling agents such as 1,1′-carbonyldiimidazole (P. L. Ornstein et al, J. Med Chem, 1996, 39(11), 2232).
  • The alkyl- and alkenyl-sulphonylcarboxamides are similarly prepared from the corresponding carboxylic acid and the alkyl- or alkenyl-sulphonamide by dehydration with standard peptide coupling agents such as 1,1′-carbonyldiimidazole (P. L. Ornstein et al, J. Med. Chem., 1996, 39(11), 2232).
  • The hydroxamic acid groups are prepared from the corresponding acids by standard amide coupling reactions e.g. N. R. Patel et al, Tetrahedron, 1987, 43(22), 5375.
  • 2,4-Thiazolidinedione groups may prepared from the aldehydes by condensation with 2,4-thiazolidinedione and subsequent removal of the olefinic double bond by hydrogenation.
  • The preparation of 5-oxo-1,2,4-oxadiazoles from nitrites is described by Y. Kohara et al, Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 1995, 5(17). 1903.
  • 1,2,4-Triazol-5-yl groups may be prepared from the corresponding nitrile by reaction with an alcohol under acid conditions followed by reaction with hydrazine and then an R10-substituted activated carboxylic acid (see J. B. Polya in “Comprehensive Heterocyclic Chemistry” Edition 1, p 762, Ed A. R. Katritzky and C. W. Rees, Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1984 and J. J. Ares et al, J. Heterocyclic Chem., 1991, 28(5), 1197).
  • Other substituents on R3 alkyl or alkenyl may be interconverted by conventional methods, for example hydroxy may be derivatised by esterification, acylation or etherification. Hydroxy groups may be converted to halogen, thiol, alkylthio, azido, alkylcarbonyl, amino, aminocarbonyl, oxo, alkylsulphonyl, alkenylsulphonyl or aminosulphonyl by conversion to a leaving group and substitution by the required group or oxidation as appropriate or reaction with an activated acid, isocyanate or alkoxyisocyanate. Primary and secondary hydroxy groups can be oxidised to an aldehyde or ketone respectively and alkylated with a suitable agent such as an organometallic reagent to give a secondary or tertiary alcohol as appropriate. A carboxylate group may be converted to an hydroxymethyl group by reduction of an ester of this acid with a suitable reducing agent such as lithium aluminium hydride.
  • An NH2 substituent on piperidine is converted to NR2R4 by conventional means such as amide or sulphonamide formation with an acyl derivative R5COW or R5SO2W, for compounds where U is CO or SO2 or, where U is CH2, by alkylation with an alkyl halide R5CH2-halide in the presence of base, acylation/reduction with an acyl derivative R5COW or reductive alkylation with an aldehyde R5CHO.
  • Where one of R3 and R6, R7, R8 or R9 contains a carboxy group and the other contains a hydroxy or amino group they may together form a cyclic ester or amide linkage. This linkage may form spontaneously during coupling of the compound of formula (IV) and the piperidine moiety or in the presence of standard peptide coupling agents.
  • It will be appreciated that under certain circumstances interconvertions may interfere, for example, A or B hydroxy groups in A or B and the piperidine substituent NH2 will require protection e.g. as a carboxy- or silyl-ester group for hydroxy and as an acyl derivative for piperidine NH2, during conversion of R1′, R2′, R3′ or R4′, or during the coupling of the compounds of formulae (IV) and (V).
  • Compounds of formulae (IV) and (V) are known compounds, (see for example Smith et al, J. Amer. Chem. Soc., 1946, 68, 1301) or prepared analogously.
  • Compounds of formula (IV) where X is CR6R7SO2W may be prepared by a route analogous to that of Ahmed El Hadri et al, J. Heterocyclic Chem., 1993, 30(3), 631. Thus compounds of formula (IV) where X is CH2SO2OH may be prepared by reacting the corresponding 4-methyl compound with N-bromosuccinimide, followed by treatment with sodium sulfite. The leaving group W may be converted to another leaving group W, e.g. a halogen group, by conventional methods.
  • The isocyanate of formula (IV) may be prepared conventionally from a 4-amino derivative such as 4-amino-quinoline, and phosgene, or phosgene equivalent (eg triphosgene) or it may be prepared more conveniently from a 4-carboxylic acid by a “one-pot” Curtius Reaction with diphenyl phosphoryl azide (DPPA) [see T. Shiori et al. Chem. Pharm. Bull. 35, 2698-2704 (1987)].
  • The 4-amino derivatives are commercially available or may be prepared by conventional procedures from a corresponding 4-chloro or 4-trifluoromethanesulphonate derivative by treatment with ammonia (O. G. Backeberg et. al., J. Chem Soc., 381, 1942) or propylamine hydrochloride (R. Radinov et. al., Synthesis, 886, 1986).
  • 4-Alkenyl compounds of formula (IV) may be prepared by conventional procedures from a corresponding 4-halogeno-derivative by e.g. a Heck synthesis as described in e.g. Organic Reactions, 1982, 27, 345.
  • 4-Halogeno derivatives of compounds of formula (IV) are commercially available, or may be prepared by methods known to those skilled in the art. A 4-chloroquinoline is prepared from the corresponding quinolin-4-one by reaction with phosphorus oxychloride (POCl3) or phosphorus pentachloride, PCl5. A 4-chloroquinazoline is prepared from the corresponding quinazolin-4-one by reaction with phosphorus oxychloride (POCl3) or phosphorus pentachloride, PCl5. A quinazolinone and quinazolines may be prepared by standard routes as described by T. A. Williamson in Heterocyclic Compounds, 6, 324 (1957) Ed. R. C. Elderfield.
  • 4-Carboxy derivatives of compounds of formula (IV) are commercially available or may be prepared by conventional procedures for preparation of carboxy heteroaromatics well known to those skilled in the art. For example, quinazolines may be prepared by standard routes as described by T. A. Williamson in Heterocyclic Compounds, 6, 324 (1957) Ed. R. C. Elderfield. These 4-carboxy derivatives maybe activated by conventional means, e.g. by conversion to an acyl halide or anhydride.
  • Pyridazines may be prepared by routes analogous to those described in Comprehensive Heterocyclic Chemistry, Volume 3, Ed A. J. Boulton and A. McKillop and napthyridines may be prepared by routes analogous to those described in Comprehensive Heterocyclic Chemistry, Volume 2, Ed A. J. Boulton and A. McKillop.
  • A 4-oxirane derivative of compounds of formula (IV) is conveniently prepared from the 4-carboxylic acid by first conversion to the acid chloride with oxalyl chloride and then reaction with trimethylsilyldiazomethane to give the diazoketone derivative. Subsequent reaction with 5M hydrochloric acid gives the chloromethylketone. Reduction with sodium borohydride in aqueous methanol gives the chlorohydrin which undergoes ring closure to afford the epoxide on treatment with base, e.g. potassium hydroxide in ethanol-tetrahydrofuran.
  • Alternatively and preferably, 4-oxirane derivatives can be prepared from bromomethyl ketones which can be obtained from 4-hydroxy compounds by other routes well known to those skilled in he art. For example, hydroxy compounds can be converted to the corresponding 4-trifluoromethanesulphonates by reaction with trifluoromethanesulphonic anhydride under standard conditions (see K. Ritter, Synthesis, 1993, 735). Conversion into the corresponding butyloxyvinyl ethers can be achieved by a Heck reaction with butyl vinyl ether under palladium catalysis according to the procedure of W. Cabri et al, J. Org. Chem, 1992, 57 (5), 1481. (Alternatively, the equivalent intermediates can be attained by Stille coupling of the trifluoromethanesulphonates or the analogous chloro derivatives with (1-ethoxyvinyl)tributyl tin, (T. R. Kelly, J. Org. Chem., 1996, 61, 4623).) The alkyloxyvinyl ethers are then converted into the corresponding bromomethylketones by treatment with N-bromosuccinimide in aqueous tetrahydrofuran in a similar manner to the procedures of J. F. W. Keana, J. Org. Chem., 1983, 48, 3621 and T. R. Kelly, J. Org. Chem., 1996, 61, 4623.
  • The 4-hydroxyderivatives can be prepared from an aminoaromatic by reaction with methylpropiolate and subsequent cyclisation, analogous to the method described in N. E. Heindel et al, J. Het. Chem., 1969, 6, 77. For example, 5-amino-2-methoxy pyridine can be converted to 4-hydroxy-6-methoxy-[1,5]naphthyridine using this method.
  • If a chiral reducing agent such as (+) or (−)-B-chlorodiisopinocamphenylborane [‘DIP-chloride’] is substituted for sodium borohydride, the prochiral chloromethylketone is converted into the chiral chlorohydrin with ee values generally 85-95% [see C. Bohm et al, Chem. Ber. 125, 1169-1190, (1992)]. Recrystallisation of the chiral epoxide gives material in the mother liquor with enhanced optical purity (typically ee 95%).
  • The (R)-epoxide, when reacted with a piperidine derivative gives ethanolamine compounds as single diastereomers with (R)-stereochemistry at the benzylic position.
  • Alternatively, the epoxide may be prepared from the 4-carboxaldehyde by a Wittig approach using trimethylsulfonium iodide [see G. A. Epling and K-Y Lin, J. Het. Chem., 1987, 24, 853-857], or by epoxidation of a 4-vinyl derivative.
  • 4-Hydroxy-1,5-naphthyridines can be prepared from 3-aminopyridine derivatives by reaction with diethyl ethoxymethylene malonate to produce the 4-hydroxy-3-carboxylic acid ester derivative with subsequent hydrolysis to the acid, followed by thermal decarboxylation in quinoline (as for example described for 4-Hydroxy-[1,5]naphthyridine-3-carboxylic acid, J. T. Adams et al., J. Amer. Chem. Soc., 1946, 68, 1317). A 4-hydroxy-[1,5]naphthyridine can be converted to the 4-chloro derivative by heating in phosphorus oxychloride, or to the 4-methanesulphonyloxy or 4-trifluoromethanesulphonyloxy derivative by reaction with methanesulphonyl chloride or trifluoromethanesulphonic anhydride, respectively, in the presence of an organic base. A 4-amino 1,5-naphthyridine can be obtained from the 4-chloro derivative by reaction with n-propylamine in pyridine.
  • Similarly, 6-methoxy-1,5-naphthyridine derivatives can be prepared from 3-amino-6-methoxypyridine.
  • 1,5-Naphthyridines may be prepared by other methods well known to those skilled in the art (for examples see P. A. Lowe in “Comprehensive Heterocyclic Chemistry” Volume 2, p 581-627, Ed A. R. Katritzky and C. W. Rees, Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1984).
  • The 4-hydroxy and 4-amino-cinnolines may be prepared following methods well known to those skilled in the art [see A. R. Osborn and K. Schofield, J. Chem. Soc. 2100 (1955)]. For example, a 2-aminoacetophenone is diazotised with sodium nitrite and acid to produce the 4-hydroxycinnoline with conversion to chloro and amino derivatives as described for 1,5-naphthyridines.
  • RA groups where the ring (y) is 4-pyridyl are available by the sequence described below, starting from an aromatic or heterocyclic amine (1), with at least one free CH position adjacent to the amine. Reaction with Meldrum's acid and trimethyl orthformate in ethanol at reflux affords the corresponding 2,2-dimethyl-5-phenylaminomethylene-[1,3]dioxane-4,6-dione derivatives (2). These can be cyclised at elevated temperatures (180-220° C.) in inert solvents such as Dowtherm to give the corresponding 1H-quinolin-4-one (3) or heterocyclic analogues eg 1H-[1,6]naphthyridin-4-one. These processes are well-established and are described by Walz and Sundberg (J. Org. Chem., 2000, 65 (23), 8001) and by Todter and Lackner (Synthesis, 1997 (5) 576).
    Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00014
  • Activation of the quinolone species related to (3) into the corresponding 4-quinolyl bromides (4) can be accomplished with phosphorous oxybromide or more preferably phosphorous tribromide in N,N-dimethylformamide (see M. Schmittel et al, Synlett, 1997, (9), 1096 and K. Gould et al, J. Med., Chem., 1988, 31 (7), 1445). The corresponding chlorides (5) are available by using phosphoryl oxychloride (for instance C. W. Wright et al, J. Med., Chem., 2001, 44 (19), 3187).
    Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00015
  • Alternatively, the quinolone species may be activated to the corresponding 1,1,1-trifluoro-methanesulfonic acid quinolin-4-yl esters (6) by the action of agents such as triflic anhydride or more preferably N-trifluoromethanesulphonimide (see for example M. Alvarez et al, Tet 2000, 56 (23) 3703; M. Alvarez et al, Eur. J. Org., Chem., 2000, (5), 849; J. Joule et al, Tet, 1998, 54 (17), 4405; J. K. Stille et al, J.A.C.S., 1988, 110 (12), 4051).
  • Activated species such as (4), (5), and (6) can then be subjected to a variety of metal-catalysed coupling reactions, such as amidation with primary carboxamides to give compounds such as (7) following the procedures of S. L. Buchwald et al (J.A.C.S., 2001, 123, 4051 and 7727; Org. Lett., 1999, 1, 35) or Sonogashira coupling with acetylenes to give compounds such as (8) (see A. Droz et al, Helv. Chim. Acta., 2001, 84 (8), 2243; M. Belly et al, Synlett, 2001 (2), 222; M. Pirrung et al, J.A.C.S., 2001, 123 (16), 3638).
    Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00016
  • RA thieno[3,2-b]pyridin-7-yl, 2,3-dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-b]pyridin-8-yl, quinolin-8-yl and isoquinolin-5-yl derivatives are commercially available or prepared by conventional methods from commercially available or literature derivatives, for example 4H-thieno[3,2-b]pyridin-4-one, 2,3-dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-b]pyridine (prepared by the method of H. Neunhoffer et al, Chem., Ber., 1990, 123), 2-methoxy-quinolin-8-ylamine (prepared by the method of K. Mislow et al J.A.C.S. 68, 1353 (1946)), 2,8-quinolinediol or trifluoromethane sulphonic acid-isoquinolin-5-yl ester (prepared as in D. Ortwine et al, J. Med. Chem., 1992, 35 (8), 1345).
  • RA quinoxalin-5-yl derivatives may be obtained from 2- or 3-methylquinoxalin-5-ol prepared as described by Y. Abe et al, J. Med. Chem., 1998, 41 (21), 4062 or from suitable substituted derivatives prepared by analogous methods. RA 3-methoxyquinoxaline-5-yl derivatives may be obtained from 3-oxoquinoxalin-5-yl prepared by the general methods of F. J. Wolf et al., J.A.C.S. 1949, 71, 6, using a suitable methylating agent such as trimethylsilyl(diazomethane). The corresponding 1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-quinoxalin-5-yl may be prepared by reduction with a suitable reducing agent such as sodium cyanoborohydride in the presence of an acid such as acetic acid.
  • The isoquinolin-8-yl system can be prepared from the appropriately substituted benzylamine by cyclocondensation with diethoxy-acetaldehyde (see, for example, K. Kido and Y. Watanabe, Chemical & Pharmaceutical Bulletin, 35(12), 4964-6; 1987). Alternatively 8-bromo-isoquinoline (prepared by the method of F. T. Tyson, J.A.C.S., 1939, 61, N. Briet et al., Tetrahedron (2002), 58(29), 5761-5766 or W. D. Brown, et al., Synthesis (2002), (1), 83-86. 183 can be subjected to N-oxidation and rearrangement to give 8-bromo-2H-isoquinolin-1-one. This can be N-methylated to give 8-bromo-2-methyl-2H-isoquinolin-1-one, an appropriate intermediate for the 2-methyl-1-oxo-1,2-dihydroisoquinolin-8-yl system.
  • The 1-methoxy-isoquinolin-8-yl system can also be obtained from the 8-bromoisoquinoline-N-oxide above by rearrangement with methyl chloroformate to give 8-bromo-1-methoxy-isoquinoline, an appropriate intermediate for the 1-methoxy-isoquinolin-8-yl system.
  • For compounds of formula (V), suitable amines may be prepared from the corresponding 4-substituted piperidine acid or alcohol. In a first instance, an N-protected piperidine containing an acid bearing substituent, can undergo a Curtius rearrangement and the intermediate isocyanate can be converted to a carbamate by reaction with an alcohol. Conversion to the amine may be achieved by standard methods well known to those skilled in the art used for amine protecting group removal. For example, an acid substituted N-protected piperidine can undergo a Curtius rearrangement e.g. on treatment with diphenylphosphoryl azide and heating, and the intermediate isocyanate reacts in the presence of 2-trimethylsilylethanol to give the trimethylsilylethylcarbamate (T. L. Capson & C. D. Poulter, Tetrahedron Lett., 1984, 25, 3515). This undergoes cleavage on treatment with tetrabutylammonium fluoride to give the 4-amine substituted N-protected piperidine.
  • In a second instance, an N-protected piperidine containing an alcohol bearing substituent undergoes a Mitsunobu reaction (for example as reviewed in Mitsunobu, Synthesis, (1981), 1), for example with succinimide in the presence of diethyl azodicarboxylate and triphenylphosphine to give the phthalimidoethylpiperidine. Removal of the phthaloyl group, for example by treatment with methylhydrazine, gives the amine of formula (V).
  • R5CH2-halides, acyl derivative R5COW and R5SO2W or aldehydes R5CHO are commercially available or are prepared conventionally. The aldehydes may be prepared by partial reduction of the R5-ester with lithium aluminium hydride or di-isobutylaluminium hydride or more preferably by reduction to the alcohol, with lithium aluminium hydride or sodium borohydride or lithium triethylborohydride (see Reductions by the Alumino- and Borohydrides in Organic Synthesis, 2nd ed., Wiley, N.Y., 1997; JOC, 3197, 1984; Org. Synth. Coll., 102, 1990; 136, 1998; JOC, 4260, 1990; TL, 995, 1988; JOC, 1721, 1999; Liebigs Ann./Recl., 2385, 1997; JOC, 5486, 1987), followed by oxidation to the aldehyde with manganese (II) dioxide, or by a ‘Swern’ procedure (oxalyl chloride/DMSO), or by using potassium dichromate (PDC). The aldehydes may also be prepared from carboxylic acids in two stages by conversion to a mixed carbonate for example by reaction with isobutyl chloroformate followed by reduction with sodium borohydride (R. J. Alabaster et al., Synthesis, 598, 1989) to give the hydroxymethyl substituted heteroaromatic or aromatic and then oxidation with a standard oxidising agent such as pyridinium dichromate or manganese (II) dioxide. Acyl derivative R5COW may be prepared by activation of the R5-ester. R5CH2-halides such as bromides may be prepared from the alcohol R5CH2OH by reaction with phosphorus tribromide in DCM/triethylamine.
  • Alternatively the aldehyde R5CHO and sulphonic acid derivative R5SO2W may be generated by treatment of the R5H heterocycle with suitable reagents. For example benzoxazinones, or more preferably their N-methylated derivatives can be formylated with hexamine in either trifluoroacetic acid or methanesulfonic acid, in a modified Duff procedure [O. I. Petrov et al. Collect. Czech. Chem. Commun. 62, 494-497 (1997)]. 4-Methyl-4H-benzo[1,4]oxazin-3-one may also be formylated using dichloromethyl methyl ether and aluminium chloride giving exclusively the 6-formyl derivative. Reaction of a R5H heterocycle with chlorosulphonic acid gives the sulphonic acid derivative (by methods analogous to Techer et. al., C. R. Hebd. Seances Acad. Sci. Ser. C; 270, 1601, 1970).
  • The aldehyde R5CHO may be generated by conversion of an R5halogen or R5trifluoromethane sulphonyloxy derivative into an olefin with subsequent oxidative cleavage by standard methods. For example, reaction of a bromo derivative under palladium catalysis with trans-2-phenylboronic acid under palladium catalysis affords a styrene derivative which upon ozonolysis affords the required R5CHO (Stephenson, G. R., Adv. Asymmetric Synth. (1996), 275-298. Publisher: Chapman & Hall, London).
  • R5H heterocycles are commercially available or may be prepared by conventional methods. For example where a benzoxazinone is required, a nitrophenol may be alkylated with for example ethyl bromoacetate and the resulting nitro ester reduced with Fe in acetic acid (alternatively Zn/AcOH/HCl or H2/Pd/C or H2/Raney Ni). The resulting amine may undergo spontaneous cyclisation to the required benzoxazinone, or cyclisation may be induced by heating in acetic acid. Alternatively a nitrophenol may be reduced to the aminophenol, which is reacted with chloroacetyl chloride [method of X. Huang and C. Chan, Synthesis 851 (1994)] or ethyl bromoacetate in DMSO [method of Z. Moussavi et al. Eur. J. Med. Chim. Ther. 24, 55-60 (1989)]. The same general routes can be applied to prepare benzothiazinones [See for example F. Eiden and F. Meinel, Arch. Pharm. 312, 302-312 (1979), H. Fenner and R Grauert Liebigs. Ann. Chem. 193-313 (1978)]. A variety of routes are available to prepare aza analogues of benzothiazinones via the key corresponding aldehydes. For instance, 2-oxo-2,3-dihydro-1H-pyrido[3,4-b][1,4]thiazine-7-carbaldehyde may be accessed from 5-fluoro-2-picoline (E. J. Blanz, F. A. French, J. R. DoAmaral and D. A. French, J. Med. Chem. 1970, 13, 1124-1130) by constructing the thiazinone ring onto the pyridyl ring then functionalising the methyl substituent. The dioxin analogue of this aza substitution pattern, 2,3-dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridine-7-carbaldehyde is accessible from Kojic acid by aminolysis from pyrone to pyridone then annelating the dioxin ring. Other aza substitution patterns with pyridothiazin-3-one, pyridooxazin-3-one, and pyridodioxin ring systems are also accessible. Ortho-aminothiophenols may be conveniently prepared and reacted as their zinc complexes [see for example V. Taneja et al Chem. Ind. 187 (1984)]. Benzoxazolones may be prepared from the corresponding aminophenol by reaction with carbonyl diimidazole, phosgene or triphosgene. Reaction of benzoxazolones with diphosphorus pentasulfide affords the corresponding 2-thione. Thiazines and oxazines can be prepared by reduction of the corresponding thiazinone or oxazinone with a reducing agent such as lithium aluminium hydride.
  • The amines R2′R4′NH are available commercially or prepared conventionally. For example amines R5CH2NH2 may be prepared from a bromomethyl derivative by reaction with sodium azide in dimethylformamide (DMF), followed by hydrogenation of the azidomethyl derivative over palladium-carbon. An alternative method is to use potassium phthalimide/DMF to give the phthalimidomethyl derivative, followed by reaction with hydrazine in DCM to liberate the primary amine.
  • Conversions of R1a′, R1′, R2′, R3′ and R4′ maybe carried out on the intermediates of formulae (IV), and (V) prior to their reaction to produce compounds of formula (I) in the same way as described above for conversions after their reaction.
  • Further details for the preparation of compounds of formula (I) are found in the examples.
  • The compounds of formula (I) may be prepared singly or as compound libraries comprising at least 2, for example 5 to 1,000 compounds, and more preferably 10 to 100 compounds of formula (I). Libraries of compounds of formula (I) may be prepared by a combinatorial “split and mix” approach or by multiple parallel synthesis using either solution phase or solid phase chemistry, by procedures known to those skilled in the art.
  • Thus according to a further aspect of the invention there is provided a compound library comprising at least 2 compounds of formula (I) or pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof.
  • Novel intermediates of formulae (IV) and (V) are also part of this invention.
  • The antibacterial compounds according to the invention may be formulated for administration in any convenient way for use in human or veterinary medicine, by analogy with other antibacterials.
  • The pharmaceutical compositions of the invention include those in a form adapted for oral, topical or parenteral use and may be used for the treatment of bacterial infection in mammals including humans.
  • The composition may be formulated for administration by any route. The compositions may be in the form of tablets, capsules, powders, granules, lozenges, creams or liquid preparations, such as oral or sterile parenteral solutions or suspensions.
  • The topical formulations of the present invention may be presented as, for instance, ointments, creams or lotions, eye ointments and eye or ear drops, impregnated dressings and aerosols, and may contain appropriate conventional additives such as preservatives, solvents to assist drug penetration and emollients in ointments and creams.
  • The formulations may also contain compatible conventional carriers, such as cream or ointment bases and ethanol or oleyl alcohol for lotions. Such carriers may be present as from about 1% up to about 98% of the formulation. More usually they will form up to about 80% of the formulation.
  • Tablets and capsules for oral administration may be in unit dose presentation form, and may contain conventional excipients such as binding agents, for example syrup, acacia, gelatin, sorbitol, tragacanth, or polyvinylpyrrolidone; fillers, for example lactose, sugar, maize-starch, calcium phosphate, sorbitol or glycine; tabletting lubricants, for example magnesium stearate, talc, polyethylene glycol or silica; disintegrants, for example potato starch; or acceptable wetting agents such as sodium lauryl sulphate. The tablets may be coated according to methods well known in normal pharmaceutical practice. Oral liquid preparations may be in the form of, for example, aqueous or oily suspensions, solutions, emulsions, syrups or elixirs, or may be presented as a dry product for reconstitution with water or other suitable vehicle before use. Such liquid preparations may contain conventional additives, such as suspending agents, for example sorbitol, methyl cellulose, glucose syrup, gelatin, hydroxyethyl cellulose, carboxymethyl cellulose, aluminium stearate gel or hydrogenated edible fats, emulsifying agents, for example lecithin, sorbitan monooleate, or acacia; non-aqueous vehicles (which may include edible oils), for example almond oil, oily esters such as glycerine, propylene glycol, or ethyl alcohol; preservatives, for example methyl or propyl p-hydroxybenzoate or sorbic acid, and, if desired, conventional flavouring or colouring agents.
  • Suppositories will contain conventional suppository bases, e.g. cocoa-butter or other glyceride.
  • For parenteral administration, fluid unit dosage forms are prepared utilizing the compound and a sterile vehicle, water being preferred. The compound, depending on the vehicle and concentration used, can be either suspended or dissolved in the vehicle. In preparing solutions the compound can be dissolved in water for injection and filter sterilised before filling into a suitable vial or ampoule and sealing.
  • Advantageously, agents such as a local anaesthetic, preservative and buffering agents can be dissolved in the vehicle. To enhance the stability, the composition can be frozen after filling into the vial and the water removed under vacuum. The dry lyophilized powder is then sealed in the vial and an accompanying vial of water for injection may be supplied to reconstitute the liquid prior to use. Parenteral suspensions are prepared in substantially the same manner except that the compound is suspended in the vehicle instead of being dissolved and sterilization cannot be accomplished by filtration. The compound can be sterilised by exposure to ethylene oxide before suspending in the sterile vehicle. Advantageously, a surfactant or wetting agent is included in the composition to facilitate uniform distribution of the compound.
  • The compositions may contain from 0.1% by weight, preferably from 10-60% by weight, of the active material, depending on the method of administration. Where the compositions comprise dosage units, each unit will preferably contain from 50-500 mg of the active ingredient. The dosage as employed for adult human treatment will preferably range from 100 to 3000 mg per day, for instance 1500 mg per day depending on the route and frequency of administration. Such a dosage corresponds to 1.5 to 50 mg/kg per day. Suitably the dosage is from 5 to 20 mg/kg per day.
  • No toxicological effects are indicated when a compound of formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof is administered in the above-mentioned dosage range.
  • The compound of formula (I) may be the sole therapeutic agent in the compositions of the invention or a combination with other antibacterials. If the other antibacterial is a β-lactam then a β-lactamase inhibitor may also be employed.
  • Compounds of formula (I) are active against a wide range of organisms including both Gram-negative and Gram-positive organisms.
  • All publications, including but not limited to patents and patent applications, cited in this specification are herein incorporated by reference as if each individual publication were specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference herein as though fully set forth.
  • The following examples illustrate the preparation of certain compounds of formula (I) and the activity of certain compounds of formula (I) against various bacterial organisms.
  • Abbreviations in the Examples:
    • RT=room temperature
    • ES=Electrospray mass spec.
    • LCMS=Liquid chromatography mass spec.
    • APCI+=Atmospheric pressure chemical ionisation mass spec
    EXAMPLES Example 1 4-2-{4-[(3-Oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]oxazin-6-ylmethyl)-amino]-piperidin-1-yl}-ethyl)-quinoline-6-carbonitrile dihydrochloride
  • Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00017
    (a) 4-[(2,2-Dimethyl-4,6-dioxo-[1,3]dioxan-5-ylidenemethyl)-amino]-benzonitrile
  • A mixture of 4-amino-benzonitrile (12.5 g, 0.106 mol), 2,2-dimethyl-[1,3]dioxane-4,6-dione (18.3 g, 0.127 mol) and trimethylorthoformate (16 ml) in ethanol (100 ml) was refluxed for 3 hours. After cooling the solid was filtered off, washed with ethanol and air dried. The product was obtained as an off-white solid (27.9 g, 97%).
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 273 (MH+).
  • (b) 4-Oxo-1,4-dihydro-quinoline-6-carbonitrile
  • Intermediate (a) (27.5 g, 0.101 mol) was slowly added over five minutes to refluxing Dowtherm A (200 ml). After an additional five minutes at reflux, the mixture was allow to cool to room temperature then ether (200 ml) was added. The product was filtered off, thoroughly washed with ether then air dried to afford the product as a gold coloured solid (16.2 g, 94%).
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 171 (MH+).
  • (c) 4-Bromo-quinoline-6-carbonitrile
  • To a solution of (b) (12 g, 70.5 mmol) in DMF (75 ml) was added dropwise phosphorous tribromide (8 ml, 84.6 mmol) over five minutes (slightly exothermic). The reaction was allowed to cool to room temperature and was then diluted with ice water (100 ml) and stirred 1 hour then diluted with additional water (300 ml). The product was filtered off, washed with water and air dried to provide 14.3 g of product (87%).
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 233 (MH+).
  • (d) 4-Vinyl-quinoline-6-carbonitrile
  • To a solution of (c) (1 g, 4.3 mmol) and vinyltributyltin (1.5 mL, 5.17 mmol) in degassed toluene (20 ml) was added tetrakis(triphenylphosphine) palladium (0) (245 mg, 5 mol %) and the mixture was refluxed under argon for 2 hours. Evaporation and flash silica chromatography eluting with chloroform afforded the product as a pale yellow solid (500 mg, 64%).
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 181 (MH+).
  • (e) {1-[2-(6-Cyano-quinolin-4-yl)-ethyl]-piperidin-4-yl}-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester
  • A mixture of (d) (150 mg, 0.8 mmol), piperidin-4-yl-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (166 mg, 0.8 mmol) and chloroform (0.5 ml) were heated at 50° C. in a loosely capped vial for 6 hours. The product was purified by flash silica chromatography eluting with a 0-2% methanol in chloroform gradient affording the product as a foam (304 mg, 96%).
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 381 (MH+).
  • (f) 2-Bromo-5-hydroxy-6-nitropyridine
  • 3-Hydroxy-2-nitropyridine (20 g, 0.143 mole) was dissolved in methanol (400 ml) and a solution of 25% sodium methoxide in methanol (33 ml, 0.13 mol) was added at room temperature. The mixture was stirred for 30 minutes, then cooled to 0° C., and bromine (7.2 ml, 0.14 mol) was added slowly. The reaction was then stirred at 0° C. for 30 minutes, then was quenched with glacial AcOH (2.5 ml). The solvent was removed in vacuo to afford material (30 g, 96%), which was used without further purification.
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 219 (MH+).
  • (g) Ethyl (6-bromo-2-nitro-pyridin-3-yloxy)acetate
  • The hydroxypyridine (f) (30 g, 0.14 mol) was suspended in acetone (200 ml), and potassium carbonate (39 g, 0.28 mol) was added, followed by ethyl bromoacetate (15.7 ml, 0.14 mmol). The reaction was heated at reflux for 10 hours, then was cooled to room temperature and diluted with Et2O. The precipitate was removed by suction filtration, and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to afford material (38 g, 89%), which was used without further purification.
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 305 (MH+).
  • (h) 6-Bromo-4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]oxazin-3-one
  • The nitropyridine (g) (38 g, 0.125 mol) was dissolved in glacial AcOH (150 ml), and iron powder (20 g, 0.36 mole) was added. The mixture was mechanically stirred and heated at 90° C. for 5 hours, then was cooled to room temperature and diluted with EtOAc (300 ml). The mixture was filtered through a pad of silica gel and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and the residue recrystallized from MeOH (15 g, 52%).
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 229 (MH+).
  • (i) 6-((E)-Styryl)-4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]oxazin-3-one
  • The bromopyridine (h) (6.0 g, 26.3 mmol) and trans-2-phenylvinylboronic acid (3.9 g, 26.3 mmol) were dissolved in 1,4-dioxane (150 ml) and the solution was degassed with argon. (Ph3P)4Pd (230 mg, 0.2 mmol) was added, followed by a solution of potassium carbonate (6.9 g, 50 mmol) in water (20 ml). The reaction was heated at reflux under argon overnight, then was cooled to room temperature and diluted with EtOAc (200 ml). The solution was washed sequentially with water and brine, dried (Na2SO4), and concentrated in vacuo. The solid residue was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel (5-10% EtOAc/CHCl3) to afford a solid (2.5 g, 38%).
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 253 (MH+).
  • (j) 3-Oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]oxazine-6-carboxaldehyde
  • The pyridine (i) (1.2 g, 4.8 mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (200 ml) and the solution was cooled to −78° C. Ozone was bubbled through the solution with stirring until a pale blue color appeared, then the excess ozone was removed by bubbling oxygen through the solution for 15 min. Dimethylsulfide (1.76 ml, 24 mmol) was added to the solution, and the reaction was stirred at −78° C. for 3 hours, then at room temperature overnight. The solvent was removed in vacuo, and the residue was triturated with Et2O (50 ml). The collected solid was washed with additional Et2O and dried to afford a solid (700 mg, 82%).
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 179 (MH+).
  • (k) Title Compound:
  • A solution of (e) (119 mg, 0.31 mmol) in dichloromethane (2 ml) was treated with trifluoroacetic acid (2 ml) dropwise and then stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. Evaporation to dryness gave the crude trifluoroacetate salt of the amine which was redissolved in dichloromethane (3 ml) and methanol (1 ml). Aldehyde (j) (55 mg, 0.31 mmol) and triethylamine (0.17 ml) were added and the mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. Sodium borohydride (38 mg, 1 mmol) was added and the reaction was allowed to stir for 1 hour. Dilution with chloroform, washing with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate, drying and evaporation gave an oil. Chromatography on silica gel eluting with 2-10% methanol in chloroform afforded the free base of the title compound as an oil. Redissolving in ethylacetate-methanol and treatment with 2 equivalents of HCl precipitated the dihydrochloride salt of the product which was filtered, washed with ether and dried (45 mg, 26%)
  • 1H NMR (MeOH-d4, 400 MHz): 8.92 (d, 1H), 8.48 (d, 1H), 8.20 (d, 1H), 7.84 (dd, 1H), 7.40 (d, 1H), 7.20 (d, 1H), 6.94 (d, 1H), 4.65 (s, 2H), 3.85 (s, 2H), 3.28 (m, 2H), 3.02 (m, 2H), 2.72 (m, 2H), 2.56 (m, 1H), 2.15 (m, 2H), 1.96 (m, 2H), 1.54 (m, 2H).
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 443 (MH+).
    • Example 2 6-({(3R,4S)-3-Fluoro-1-[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(2-methoxy-quinolin-8-yl)-ethyl]-piperidin-4-ylamino}-methyl)4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-3-one dihydrochloride and 6-({(3S,4R)-3-Fluoro-1-[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(2-methoxy-quinolin-8-yl)-ethyl]-piperidin-4-ylamino}-methyl)4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-3-one dihydrochloride
  • Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00018
    (a) 8-Benzyoxyquinolin-2-ol
  • To a stirred solution of 2,8-quinolinediol (30.84 mmol, 4.97 g; Fluka) and DBU (40.2 mmol, 6 mL) in isopropyl alcohol (60 mL) was added benzyl bromide (30.84 mmol, 3.7 mL). The solution was heated at reflux overnight. The reaction mixture was allowed to cool and then concentrated in vacuo. The resulting residue was diluted with CH2Cl2 and washed with 0.5 N NaOH, 10% HCl and water and dried over Na2SO4. Concentration provided 6 g (77%) of the tan solid, which was used without further purification. LC/MS: (ES) m/z 252 (M+H)+.
  • (b) 8-Benzyloxy-2-methoxyquinoline
  • 8-Benzyloxyquinolin-2-ol (a) (6 g, 23.9 mmol) was added to POCl3 (45 mL) and heated with stirring at 80° C. for 10 h. The reaction was allowed to cool to room temperature and the excess POCl3 was decomposed by slowly pouring the mixture into water at 30° C. The product was then extracted into toluene and the combined organic layers were washed with saturated aq. NaHCO3 and dried over MgSO4. Concentration provided 6.9 g of a colorless oil, crude 2-chloro-8-benzyloxyquinoline, which was directly used in the next reaction step. LC/MS: (ES) m/z 270 (M+H)+.
  • The crude 2-chloro-8-benzyloxyquinoline from above was dissolved in toluene (10 mL) and added to a stirred 25 wt % solution of NaOMe in MeOH (50 mL). The reaction solution was heated with stirring overnight at 70° C. After cooling to room temperature, the reaction solution was poured onto ice and extracted with toluene. The combined organic extracts were dried (MgSO4) and concentrated in vacuo to give a colorless oil (6.14 g, 92%). The product was used without further purification.
  • LC/MS: (ES) m/z 266 (M+H)+.
  • (c) 1,1,1-Trifluoromethanesulfonic acid 2-methoxyquinolin-8-yl ester
  • 8-Benzyloxy-2-methoxyquinoline (b) (6.14 g, 23 mmol) was dissolved in EtOH (50 mL) and treated with 10% Pd/C (600 mg). The reaction mixture was hydrogenated under an H2 atmosphere (20 psi) in a Parr shaker apparatus for 3.5 h. The reaction was filtered and concentrated to give 3.8 g (96%) of a colorless oil.
  • LC/MS: (ES) m/z 176 (M+H)+.
  • The product from above (3.8 g, 22 mmol) was dissolved in DMF (40 mL) and treated with triethylamine (3.6 mL, 25.8 mmol) and N-phenyltrifluoromethanesulfonimide (8.54 g, 23.9 mmol). The reaction mixture was heated with stirring at 40° C. for 8 h. Upon cooling to room temperature, aq. K2CO3 solution was added and the product was extracted into CH2Cl2. The combined organic extracts were washed with water (5×75 mL), dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated to give 6.8 g (100%) of triflate as a light tan crystalline solid, which was used directly in the next reaction without additional purification. LC/MS: (ES) m/z 308 (M+H)+.
  • (d) 2-Bromo-1-(2-methoxy-quinolin-8-yl)-ethanone
  • The triflate (2c) in DMF, triethylamine, butyl vinyl ether, palladium (II) acetate and 1,3-bis(diphenylphosphino)propane is heated at 60° C. for 3 hours then evaporated and chromatographed on silica gel (dichloromethane). The product is dissolved in TBF and water and treated with N-bromosuccinimide for 1 hour, then evaporated and chromatographed on silica gel to give the ketone.
  • (e) (R)-2-Bromo-1-(2-methoxy-quinolin-8-yl)-ethanol
  • The ketone (2d) in toluene is treated with (+)-B-chlorodiisopinocamphenylborane ((+)-DIP-chloride) and stirred overnight, then diethanolamine is added and the mixture is stirred for 3 hours, filtered and then evaporated. Chromatography on silica gel gives the product.
  • (f) 2-Methoxy-8-(R)-oxiranyl-quinoline
  • The alcohol (e) in methanol is stirred with potassium carbonate for 1 hour, then is evaporated and chromatographed on silica gel to give the product.
  • (g) (3R, 4S) and (3S, 4R)-4-Amino-1-tert-butoxycarbonyl-3-fluoropiperidine
  • To a solution of the enantiomeric mixture of cis-4-benzylamino-1-tert-butoxycarbonyl-3-fluoropiperidine (prepared according to the procedures of J. Med. Chem. 1999, 42, 2087-2104, 1.0 g, 3.2 mmole) in EtOH (40 mL) was added 3 N HCl (2.5 L) and 10% Pd/C (50 mg). The reaction was shaken under H2 (40 psi) on a Parr apparatus for 14 h, then was filtered through Celite®. The filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure, and the residue was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel (10% MeOH/CHCl3) to afford the title compound (370 mg, 53%) as a white solid.
  • MS (ES) m/e 219 (M +H)+.
  • (h) (3R,4S) and (3S,4R)-4-Benzyloxycarbonylamino-3-fluoro-piperidine-1-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester
  • The amine (2 g) (5.49 g) in dichloromethane (150 ml) containing triethylamine (3.5 ml) was treated with benzyl chloroformate (4.0 ml) and stirred at room temperature for 5 hr. It was evaporated and chromatographed on silica gel to afford the product (4.27 g).
  • (i) ((3R,4S) and (3S,4R)-3-Fluoro-piperidin-4-yl)-carbamic acid benzyl ester
  • The carbamate (2 h) (4.27 g) was treated with trifluoroacetic acid (8 ml) in dichloromethane (40 ml) at room temperature for 3 hr then evaporated to dryness. The residue was basified with sodium carbonate and extracted with 10% methanol-dichloromethane. The solution was dried (sodium sulfate) and evaporated to give the product as a white solid (2.92 g).
  • (j) {(3R,4S) and (3S,4R)-3-Fluoro-1-[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(2-methoxy-quinolin-8-yl)-ethyl]-piperidin-4-yl}-carbamic acid benzyl ester
  • A 1:1 mixture of oxirane (2f) and piperidine (2i) is heated at 85° C. for 3 hr and the product chromatographed on silica gel.
  • (k) (R)-2-((3R,4S) and (3S,4R)-4-Amino-3-fluoro-piperidin-1-yl)-1-(2-methoxy-quinolin-8-yl)-ethanol
  • The carbamate (2j) is hydrogenated in methanol at room temperature over 10% palladium charcoal, filtered and evaporated to afford the product.
  • (1) Methyl 3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazine-6-carboxylate
  • A solution of ethyl 2-mercaptoacetate (1.473 ml) in DMF (48 ml) was ice-cooled and treated with sodium hydride (540 mg of a 60% dispersion in oil). After 1 hour methyl 6-amino-5-bromopyridine-2-carboxylate (3 g) (T. R. Kelly and F. Lang, J. Org. Chem. 61, 1996, 4623-4633) was added and the mixture stirred for 16 hours at room temperature. The solution was diluted with EtOAc (1 litre), washed with water (3×300 ml), dried and evaporated to about 10 ml. The white solid was filtered off and washed with a little EtOAc to give the ester (0.95 g).
  • MS (APCI−) m/z 223 ([M−H]−, 100%)
  • (m) 3-Oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazine-6-carboxylic acid
  • A solution of ester (2l) (788 mg) in dioxan (120 ml)/water (30 ml) was treated dropwise over 2 hours with 0.5 M NaOH solution (8 ml) and stirred overnight. After evaporation to approx. 3 ml, water (5 ml) was added and 2N HCl to pH4. The precipitated solid was filtered off, washed with a small volume of water and dried under vacuum to give a solid (636 mg).
  • MS (APCI−) m/z 209 ([M−H]−, 5%), 165([M−COOH]−, 100%)
  • (n) 6-Hydroxymethyl-3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazine
  • A solution of the carboxylic acid (2m) (500 mg) in THF (24 ml) with triethylamine (0.396 ml) was cooled to −10° C. and isobutyl chloroformate (0.339 ml) added. After 20 minutes the suspension was filtered through kieselguhr into an ice-cooled solution of sodium borohydride (272 mg) in water (8 ml), the mixture stirred 30 minutes and the pH reduced to 7 with dilute HCl. The solvent was evaporated and the residue triturated under water. The product was filtered and dried under vacuum to give a white solid (346 mg).
  • MS (APCI−) m/z 195 ([M−H]−, 50%), 165(100%)
  • (o) 3-Oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazine-6-carboxaldehyde
  • A solution of the alcohol (2n) (330 mg) in dichloromethane (30 ml)/THF (30 ml) was treated with manganese dioxide (730 mg) and stirred at room temperature. Further manganese dioxide was added after 1 hour (730 mg) and 16 hours (300 mg). After a total of 20 hours the mixture was filtered through kieselguhr and the filtrate evaporated. The product was triturated with EtOAc/hexane (1:1) and collected to give a solid (180 mg).
  • MS (APCI−) m/z 195 ([M−H]−, 95%), 165 (100%)
  • (p) Title Compound
  • A mixture of the carboxaldehyde (2o) and amine (2k) (100 mg) in DMF/methanol/acetic acid with 3A molecular sieves is heated at 85° C. for 2 hours, cooled and is treated with an excess of sodium cyanoborohydride. After stirring overnight, the mixture is diluted with chloroform (20 ml) and washed with aqueous Na2CO3. The organic fraction is dried and evaporated. Chromatography of the residue on silica gel gives the free base of the title compound. Treatment with 4M HCl in dioxan, evaporation and trituration with ether affords the title compound
    • Example 3 6-({(3R,4R)-3-Hydroxy-1-[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(2-methoxy-quinolin-8-yl)-ethyl]-piperidin-4-ylamino}-methyl)4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-3-one dihydrochloride and 6-({(3S,4S)-3-Hydroxy-1-[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(2-methoxy-quinolin-8-yl)-ethyl]-piperidin-4-ylamino}-methyl)-4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-3-one dihydrochloride
  • Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00019
    (a) tert-Butyl 3,6-dihydro-2H-pyridine-1-carboxylate
  • 1,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridine (15.0 g, 180 mmole) was added to a 10% aqueous solution of Na2CO3 (50 ml) and the solution was cooled to 0° C. Di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (39.8 g, 182 mmole) was added in portions over 15 min with vigorous stirring. The solution was stirred at 0° C. for 1 hr and then warmed to room temperature and stirred for an additional 18 hr. The reaction solution was partitioned between Et2O and saturated NaCl solution. The ether layer was dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuo to give an oil (31.80 g, 96%), which needed no further purification.
  • MS (ES) m/z 184 (M+H)+.
  • (b) tert-Butyl 7-oxa-3-aza-bicyclo[4.1.0]heptane-3-carboxylate
  • A solution of (3a) (15.0 g, 81.9 mmole) in CH2Cl2 (150 mL) was treated with a solution of meta-chloroperbenzoic acid (18.36 g, 106.4 mmole) in CH2Cl2 (300 mL) which was added over 30 minutes at 0° C. The solution was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for 18 hr. The reaction solution was washed with 5% aqueous K2CO3 and saturated NaCl solution, then dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuo to yield an off-white solid. This was flash chromatographed on silica gel (20% EtOAc/hexanes) to yield a white solid (12.80 g, 78%).
  • MS (ES) m/z 200 (M+H)+.
  • (c) tert-Butyl (±)-trans-4-benzylamino-3-hydroxypiperidine-1-carboxylate
  • The ester (3b) (13.24 g, 66.5 mmole) was combined with benzylamine (14.53 mL, 133 mmole) and stirred while heating at 115° C. The reaction was allowed to stir for 8 hr at 115° C. and then allowed to cool to ambient temperature. EtOAc was added and the organic layer was washed sequentially with H2O and saturated NaCl solution. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to yield a yellow solid (19.31 g, 95%): LCMS: m/z 307 (M+H)+. This mixture of regioisomers was chromatographed (preparative HPLC) on Lichrosphere silica gel 60A; 12 u, 100 mm ID×250 mm L; 70:30:0.5 hexanes:TBF:diethylamine; 500 ml/min; uv detection 254 nm; 4.5 g mixture per injection. The products, tert-butyl (±)-trans-3-benzylamino-4-hydroxy-piperidine-1-carboxylate and tert-butyl (±)-trans-4-benzylamino-3-hydroxy-piperidine-1-carboxylate, as assigned by NMR, were obtained in a 3:1 ratio with retention times of 8.4 min and 6.5 min, respectively.
  • (d) tert-Butyl (±)-trans-4-amino-3-hydroxypiperidine-1-carboxylate
  • A solution of the ester (3c) (0.5 g, 1.63 mmole) in EtOH (40 mL) was treated with 10% palladium on carbon (catalytic) and hydrogenated in a Parr bottle for 6 hr at 40 psi. The solution was filtered through a plug of Celite®, and the filter pad was washed with EtOH. The filtrate was concentrated to yield a yellow oil (0.35 g, 99%). No further purification was required.
  • MS (ES) m/z 217 (M+H)+.
  • (e) tert-Butyl (±)-trans-3-Hydroxy-4-[3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-6-ylmethyl)amino]piperidine-1-carboxylate
  • A solution of amine (3d) is heated at 85° C. for 2 hours with the carboxaldehyde (2o) in DMF/methanol/acetic acid with 3A molecular sieves, cooled and is treated with an excess of sodium cyanoborohydride . After stirring overnight, the mixture is diluted with chloroform (20 ml) and washed with aqueous Na2CO3. The organic fraction is dried and evaporated. Chromatography of the residue on silica gel gives the product
  • (f) (±)-trans-3-Hydroxy-4-[3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-6-ylmethyl)amino]piperidine
  • A solution of (3e) in CH2Cl2 is treated with 4.0 N HCl/dioxane. The solution is allowed to stir for 30 min and then is concentrated in vacuo and dissolved in MeOH and treated with MP-Carbonate resin. The solution is then filtered and evaporated to dryness.
  • (g) Title Compound
  • A 1:1 mixture of oxirane (2f) and piperidine (3f) is heated at 85° C. for 3 hr and then chromatographed on silica gel to provide the product
    • Example 4 6({(3R,4S)-1-[2-(2,3-Dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-f]quinolin-10-yl)-ethyl]-3-fluoro-piperidin-4-ylamino}-methyl)-4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-3-one
  • Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00020
    (a) 7-Bromo-2,3-dihydro-benzo[1,4]dioxin-6-ylamine
  • A solution of 2,3-dihydro-benzo[1,4]dioxin-6-ylamine (1 g, 6.6 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (15 ml) was cooled to 78 deg C. then treated with 1 drop of concentrated sulphuric acid followed by N-bromosuccinimide (1.2 g, 6.6 mmol). The mixture was allowed to warm to room temperature over 1 hour then evaporated. The residue was dissolved in ether, washed with water then brine, dried and evaporated to afford an oil (1.4 g, 93%).
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 231 (MH+).
  • (b) 5-[(7-Bromo-2,3-dihydro-benzo[1,4]dioxin-6-ylamino)-methylene]-2,2-dimethyl-[1,3]dioxane-4,6-dione
  • A mixture of aniline (4a) (14.8 g, 64.3 mmol), triethyl orthoformate (12.7 mL, 77.2 mmol) and 2,2-dimethyl-[1,3]dioxane-4,6-dione (Meldrum's acid) (11.1 g, 77.2 mmol) in ethanol (70 mL) was heated to reflux. After 1 hour the mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature then filtered, washing with ethanol then ether, to afford a white solid (22.9 g, 93%).
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 385 (MH+).
  • (c) 6-Bromo-2,3-dihydro-7H-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-f]quinolin-10-one
  • Enamine (4b) (22.9 g) was added portionwise to refluxing Dowtherm A (45 mL) over 3 minutes. After a further 3 minutes at reflux the mixture was cooled to room temperature. Ethyl acetate/hexane (10 mL/20 mL) was added and a black solid isolated by filtration. This residue was dissolved in hot methanol (400 mL) and filtered through Keiselguhr. Water (800 mL) was added and the mixture stored at 5° C. overnight. Filtration and drying afforded a pale yellow solid (10.3 g, 61%).
  • MS (APCI−) m/z 281 [M−H]−
  • (d) 2,3-Dihydro-7H-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-f]quinolin-10-one
  • A suspension of (4c) (3.4 g, 12 mmol) in water/dioxan (150 mL/80 mL) was treated with 1M aqueous sodium hydroxide solution then hydrogenated over 10% palladium on charcoal (1.5 g) for 20 hours. The mixture was filtered then acidified with 5M aqueous hydrochloric acid. On concentrating to ca 100 mL, a solid began to crystallise out. The mixture was stored at 5° C. overnight. Filtration and drying afforded a pale yellow solid (2.8 g, 100%).
  • MS (APCI−) m/z 202 [M−H]−
  • (e) 10-Bromo-2,3-dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-f]quinoline
  • The quinolinone (4d) in dry DMF (8 mL) was cooled in ice and phosphorus tribromide (0.7 mL) added drop-wise, and the mixture was stirred, with ice-cooling for 30 minutes then allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for a further 2 hours. It was cooled in ice and sodium carbonate solution was added and the solid was collected, washed well with water, and dried in vacuo, to afford a pale yellow solid (1.65 g).
  • MS (ES) m/z 267 (M+H)+.
  • (f) 10-Vinyl-2,3-dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-f]quinoline
  • To a solution of (4e) (0.8 g) and vinyltributyltin (1.05 mL) in degassed toluene (15 ml) was added tetrakis(triphenylphosphine) palladium (0) (173 mg) and the mixture was refluxed under argon for 2 days. More vinyltributyltin (0.8 mL) and tetrakis(triphenylphosphine) palladium (0) (173 mg) were added and the reaction mixture was heated at 130° C. for a further 18 hours. Evaporation and flash silica chromatography eluting with hexane-DCM and ethyl acetate-DCM afforded the product as a yellow oil (500 mg, 64%).
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 214 (MH+).
  • (g) {(3R,4S)-1-[2-(2,3-Dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-f]quinolin-10-yl)-ethyl]-3-fluoro-piperidin-4-yl}-carbamic acid benzyl ester
  • A mixture of (4f) (373 mg), piperidine (2i) (440 mg) and chloroform (3 ml) were heated at 120° C. in a loosely capped vial for 18 hours, under argon. The product was purified by flash silica chromatography eluting with a 0-5% methanol in dichloromethane gradient affording the product as a foam (480 mg, 59%).
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 466 (MH+).
  • (h) (3R,4S)-1-[2-(2,3-Dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-f]quinolin-10-yl)-ethyl]-3-fluoro-piperidin-4-ylamine
  • The carbamate (4g) was hydrogenated in methanol at room temperature over 10% palladium charcoal, filtered and evaporated to afford the product (240 mg, 71%)
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 332 (MH+).
  • (i) Title Compound
  • A mixture of aldehyde (2o) (142 mg) and amine (4h) (240 mg) in DMF/methane/acetic acid with 3A molecular sieves was heated at 85° C. for 3 hours, cooled and was treated with an excess of sodium cyanoborohydride. After stirring overnight, the mixture was diluted with chloroform (20 ml) and washed with aqueous sodium bicarbonate. The organic fraction was dried and evaporated. Chromatography of the residue on silica gel gave the free base of the title compound (9 mg).
  • 1H NMR δH (DMSO, 400 MHz), 1.29-1.32 (2H, m), 1.66-1.68 (2H, d), 2.07 (2H, t), 2.56 (2H, m), 2.89 (2H, m), 3.20 (3H, m), 3.95 (3H, s), 6.76 (1H, d), 7.20 (1H, s), 7.35 (1H, d), 8.15 (1H, d), 8.72 (1H, s)
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 510 (MH+).
    • Example 5 6-{[(1-{(2R/S)-2-hydroxy-2-[3-(methyloxy)-5-quinoxalinyl]ethyl}-4-piperidinyl)amino]methyl}-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-3(4H)-one dihydrochloride
  • Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00021
    (a) 2-Nitro-6-triisopropylsilanyloxy-phenylamine
  • A solution of 2-amino-3-nitro-phenol (42.9 g, 278 mmol) and imidazole (28.4 g, 417 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (750 ml) was treated with chloro-triisopropyl-silane (62.3 g, 323 mmol). After 18 hours the mixture was filtered, diluted with ethyl acetate, washed with water, dried and evaporated to give an oil (91 g).
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 311 (MH+).
  • (b) 3-Triisopropylsilanyloxy-benzene-1,2-diamine
  • A solution of (5a) (91 g) in ethanol (500 ml) was hydrogenated over 10% palladium on charcoal (8.5 g) for 3 days then filtered and evaporated to give an oil (80.7 g).
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 281 (MH+).
  • (c) 8-Triisopropylsilanyloxy-1H-quinoxalin-2-one
  • A solution of (5b) (80.7 g) in ethanol (1 litre) was treated with a 50% solution of ethyl glyoxalate in toluene (60 ml, 294 mmol) and heated to reflux for 2 hours. The mixture was left at room temperature overnight and filtered affording 5-triisopropylsilanyloxy-1H-quinoxalin-2-one. The filtrate was evaporated and the residue chromatographed eluting with a 0-3% gradient of methanol in dichloromethane affording 8-triisopropylsilanyloxy-1H-quinoxalin-2-one as a white solid (14.9 g).
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 319 (MH+).
  • (d) 2-Methoxy-8-triisopropylsilanyloxy-quinoxaline
  • A solution of (5c) (2.0 g, 6.2 mmol) in dichloromethane/methanol/acetonitrile (40 ml/4 ml/40 ml) was treated with triethylamine (1.1 ml, 8 mmol) then a solution of (trimethylsilyl)diazomethane in hexane (2M; 4 ml, 8 mmol). The mixture was stirred overnight then evaporated. The residue was chromatographed on silica eluting with dichloromethane affording an oil (1.0 g, 48%).
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 333 (MH+).
  • (e) 3-Methoxy-quinoxalin-5-ol
  • A solution of (5d) (6.95 g, 21 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran/methanol (280 ml/140 ml) was treated with caesium fluoride (4.73 g, 31.4 mmol) and stirred for 18 hours. The mixture was evaporated and the residue partitioned between diethyl ether and dilute aqueous hydrochloric acid. The aqueous phase was further extracted with diethyl ether and the combined extracts dried and evaporated to give an oil (4.2 g).
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 177 (MH+).
  • (f) 1,1,1-Trifluoro-methanesulfonic acid 3-methoxy-quinoxalin-5-yl ester
  • A solution of (5e) (4.23 g, 21 mmol) in dichloromethane (35 ml) was treated with triethylamine (4.5 ml, 32.1 mmol) then N-phenyltrifluoromethanesulfonimide (11.4 g, 32 mmol) was added. The mixture was stirred overnight then washed with saturated aqueous sodium carbonate solution. The aqueous phase was further extracted with dichloromethane and the combined organic extracts were dried and evaporated. The residue was chromatographed on silica eluting with 50% hexane in dichloromethane and then dichloromethane, affording an oil (5.6 g, 87%).
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 309 (MH+).
  • (g) 1-(3-methoxyquinoxalin-5-yl)ethanone
  • To a solution of triflate (5f) (7.4 g, 24.2 mmol) and 1,3-bis(diphenylphosphino) propane (1.0 g, 0.24 mmol) in DMF (100 mL), under argon, were added palladium acetate (0.55 g, 0.24 mmol), triethylamine (6.73 mL, 48.6 mmol) and butyl vinyl ether (12.6 mL, 97.0 mmol). The reaction mixture was heated at 70° C. for 8.5 hours. DMF was removed in vacuo and the residue was chromatographed on a silica gel column eluting with 0-2% methanol in dichloromethane, affording the product as an oil (4.22 g, 68%)
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 203 (MH+).
  • (h) 2,2-dibromo-1-[3-(methyloxy)-5-quinoxalinyl]ethanone
  • To a solution of ethanone (5g) (3.95 g, 19.5 mmol) in dioxan (40 mL), a suspension of bromine (1.14 mL, 22 mmol) in dioxan (40 mL) was added at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature over 2 nights. The reaction mixture was basified by addition of an aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate and extracted several times with dichloromethane. The combined organic extracts were washed with an aqueous solution of sodium sulfite, dried over magnesium sulfate and evaporated in vacuo. The residue was chromatographed on a silica gel column eluting with 0-2% methanol in dichloromethane, affording the product as an oil (4.19 g, 59%).
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 361 (MH+).
  • (i) 2-bromo-1-[3-(methyloxy)-5-quinoxalinyl]ethanone
  • To a solution of ethanone (5h) (4.19 g, 11.64 mmol) in THF (20 mL), cooled to 0° C., a mixture of diethyl hydrogen phosphite (1.56 mL, 12 mmol), and triethylamine (1.68 mL, 12 mmol) in THF (10 mL) was added slowly. The reaction mixture was allowed to reach room temperature overnight. More diethyl hydrogen phosphite (2×0.08 mL), and triethylamine (2×0.08 mL) were added and the reaction mixture was evaporated in vacuo after 7.5 hours. Water was added to the residue. A solid precipitated out, was washed with water and dried to afford the product as a white powder (2.68 g, 82%).
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 282 (MH+).
  • (j) (+/−) 2-(methyloxy)-8-(2-oxiranyl)quinoxaline
  • The ketone (5i) (2.83 g, 10.07 mmol) was partially dissolved in methanol (50 mL). The reaction mixture was cooled down to 0° C. before sodium borohydride (0.78 g, 20.6 mmol) was added portionwise. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 1 hour. More sodium borohydride was added (0.14 g) and the new reaction mixture was stirred for a further 20 minutes. Cesium carbonate (7.5 g, 20 mmol) was then added and the reaction mixture was allowed to reach room temperature. Stirring at room temperature was continued for 3 days until total conversion to epoxide. The mixture was diluted with water and extracted several times with dichloromethane. The combined organic extracts were washed with water, dried over magnesium sulfate and evaporated in vacuo. The residue was chromatographed on a silica gel column eluting with 0-1% methanol in dichloromethane, affording the product as a white solid (0.83 g, 41%)
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 203 (MH+).
  • (k) (+/−) 1,1-dimethylethyl (1-{2-hydroxy-2-[3-(methyloxy)-5-quinoxalinyl]ethyl}-4-piperidinyl)carbamate
  • A mixture of oxirane (5j) (0.83 g, 4.1 mmol) and 1,1-dimethylethyl 4-piperidinylcarbamate (1.23 g, 6.16 mmol) in DMF (1 mL) was heated at 90° C. for 4 hours then cooled down to room temperature. The reaction mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with water. The aqueous layer was extracted a second time with ethyl acetate. The combined organic extracts were dried over magnesium sulfate and evaporated in vacuo. The residue was chromatographed on a silica gel column eluting with 2-5% methanol in dichloromethane, affording the product as a white solid (1.46 g, 88%)
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 403 (MH+).
  • (l) (+/−) 2-(4-amino-1-piperidinyl)-1-[3-(methyloxy)-5-quinoxalinyl]ethanol
  • A solution of amine (5k) in dioxan (10 mL) was treated with 4.0N HCl/dioxan. The solution was allowed to stir at room temperature for 3.5 hours. The reaction mixture was diluted with diethyl ether and filtered. The precipitate was washed with more diethyl ether and dried in vacuo. It was then recrystallised from methanol/dichloromethane. The crystals were redissolved in a minimum amount of water and the solution was basified by addition of sodium bicarbonate. The solution was extracted several times with 10% methanol in dichloromethane. The combined organic extracts were dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and evaporated in vacuo to afford the product as a solid (0.64 g, 57%)
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 303 (MH+).
  • (m) Title Compound
  • A mixture of ethanol (5l) (30 mg, 0.1 mmol) and aldehyde (2o) (19 mg, 0.1 mmol) in chloroform/methanol with 3A molecular sieves was heated at reflux for 5 hours, cooled and was treated with sodium triacetoxyborohydride (42 mg, 0.2 mmol). After stirring for 48 hours at room temperature, the mixture was diluted with chloroform and washed with aqueous sodium bicarbonate. The aqueous layer was extracted again with methanol/dichloromethane. The combined organic fractions were dried and evaporated. Chromatography of the residue on silica gel eluting with 5-10% methanol in dichloromethane gave the free base of the title compound (23 mg, 48%).
  • 1H NMR δH (CDCl3, 250 MHz), 1.60-1.91 (2H, m), 2.00-2.16 (2H, m), 2.15-2.20 (1H, m) 2.32-2.84 (6H, m), 3.47 (2H, s), 3.87 (2H, s), 4.05 (3H, s), 5.78 (1H, m), 6.98 (1H, d), 7.55-7.61 (2H, m), 7.91-7.94 (2H, m), 8.48 (1 h, s)
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 481 (MH+).
  • Treatment with 4M HCl in dioxan, evaporation and trituration with ether afforded the title compound.
  • The mixture of enantiomers was separated using Supercritical Fluid Chromatography (SFC) on Chiralpak AD stationary phase, eluting with 65% methanol (containing 0.5% isopropylamine) in liquid carbon dioxide. This provided the faster-running enantiomer (61 mg, Retention time=9.4 minutes, alpha D=−91.5 degrees) then the slower-running enantiomer (68 mg, Retention time=19.9 minutes, alpha D=+89.1 degrees).
    • Example 6 (1R/S)-2-{4-[(2,3-dihydro[1,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl)amino]1-1-piperidinyl}-1-[3-(methyloxy)-5-quinoxalinyl]ethanol dihydrochloride
  • Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00022
    (a) 5-Benzyloxy-2-hydroxymethyl-1 H-pyridin-4-one
  • A mixture of 5-benzyloxy-2-hydroxymethyl-4-pyrone (prepared from Kojic acid by the method of D. Erol, J. Med. Chem., 1994, 29, 893) (9.7 g, 40 mmol), concentrated aqueous (880) ammonia (100 mL), and ethanol (20 mL) was heated to reflux overnight. The mixture was allowed to cool to room temperature then filtered. The resultant solid was washed with ether and dried in vacuo (5.9 g).
  • MS (APCI+) m/z 232 (MH+).
  • (b) (2,3-Dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-yl)-methanol
  • A solution of (6a) (2 g, 8.7 mmol) in water (220 mL) containing sodium hydroxide (17 mmol) was hydrogenated over 10% palladium on charcoal (1 g) for 4 hours. The mixture was filtered and evaporated to give a white solid. This solid was dissolved in N,N-dimethylformamide (8 mL) then treated with potassium carbonate (2.9 g) and 1,2-dibromoethane (0.6 mL, 7 mmol). The mixture was heated at 85° C. overnight. The cooled mixture was evaporated onto silica and chromatographed eluting with 10-30% methanol in ethyl acetate affording a white solid (250 mg, 21%).
  • MS (APCI+) m/z 168 (MH+).
  • (c) 2,3-Dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridine-7-carboxaldehyde
  • A solution of (6b) (250 mg, 1.5 mmol) in dichloromethane (5 mL) was treated with manganese dioxide (650 mg, 7.5 mmol). After 3 days the mixture was filtered and evaporated affording a white solid (150 mg, 61%).
  • MS (APCI+) m/z 166 (MH+).
  • (d) Title Compound
  • The free base was prepared as in Example 5 from amine (5l) (30 mg, 0.1 mmol) and aldehyde (6c) (16 mg, 0.1 mmol).
  • 1H NMR δH (CDCl3, 250 MHz), 1.43-1.61 (2H, m), 1.90-1.95 (2H, m), 2.15 (1H, m), 2.37-2.94 (6H, m), 3.47 (2H, m), 3.81 (2H, s), 4.05 (3H, s), 4.25-4.35 (4H, m), 5.74-5.79 (1H, m), 6.83 (1H, d), 7.55-7.61 (1H, m), 7.91-7.94 (2H, m), 8.11 (1H, s), 8.48 (1H, s)
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 452 (MH+).
  • Treatment with 4M HCl in dioxan, evaporation and trituration with ether afforded the title compound.
    • Example 7 {1-[2-(9-Chloro-2,3-dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-f]quinolin-10-yl)-ethyl]-piperidin-4-yl}-(2,3-dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl)-amine dihydrochloride
  • Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00023
    (a) 9-Chloro-2,3-dihydro[1,4]dioxino[2,3-f]quinolin-10(7H)-one
  • The quinolone (4d) (5.05 g) in acetic acid (70 mL) was sonicated and warmed until all had dissolved, and then it was treated with N-chlorosuccinimide (3.64 g) and the mixture was heated at 35° C. for 18 hr, cooled and the solid collected and washed with acetic acid and dried in vacuo at 40° C. overnight, to give a white solid (1.65 g)
  • MS (ES) m/z 238/240 (M+H)+
  • (b) 10-Bromo-9-chloro-2,3-dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-f]quinoline
  • The chloroquinolone (7a) in dry DMF (8 mL) was cooled in ice and phosphorus tribromide (0.7 mL) added drop-wise, and the mixture was stirred, with ice-cooling for 30 minutes then allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred for a further 2 hours. It was cooled in ice and sodium carbonate solution was added and the solid was collected, washed well with water, and dried in vacuo, to afford a pale yellow solid (1.65 g).
  • MS (ES) m/z 301/303 (M+H)+.
  • (c) 9-Chloro-10-vinyl-2,3-dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-f]quinoline
  • The bromide (7b) (1.65 g) in DME (60 mL) under argon, was treated with tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (0.32 g) and the mixture stirred at room temperature for 20 minutes. Anhydrous potassium carbonate (0.76 g), water (18 mL), and vinylborane:pyridine complex (see F. Kerins and D O'Shea J. Org. Chem. 2002, 67, 4968-4971) was added and the mixture was heated at 100° C. for 2 hr. It was cooled, diluted with water and extracted with ether, dried (magnesium sulfate) and evaporated to dryness.
  • After work-up the product was chromatographed on silica gel, eluting with (methanol-DCM) to afford a white solid (1.35 g).
  • MS (ES) m/z 248/250 (M+H)+.
  • (d) {1-[2-(9-Chloro-2,3-dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-f]quinolin-10-yl)-ethyl]-piperidin-4-yl}-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester
  • A mixture of the vinyl-quinoline (7c) (680 mg) and piperidin-4-yl-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (815 mg) in DMF (0.9 mL) and tetramethylguanidine (5 drops) was heated at 100° C. for 18 hours. It was cooled, diluted with water and extracted with ethyl acetate, dried (magnesium sulfate) and evaporated to dryness. After work-up the product was chromatographed on silica gel, eluting with methanol-DCM to afford the desired product (0.82 g).
  • MS (ES) m/z 448 (M+H)+.
  • (e) 1-[2-(9-Chloro-2,3-dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-f]quinolin-10-yl)-ethyl]-piperidin-4-ylamine
  • The ester (7d) (0.82 g) in DCM (21 mL) was treated with TFA (21 mL) at room temperature for 1 hr and evaporated. Water and sodium carbonate were added and the solution was extracted with 10% methanol in ethyl acetate, dried (magnesium sulfate) and evaporated to afford the product (0.53 g)
  • MS (ES) m/z 348 (M+H)+.
  • (f) Title Compound
  • The amine (7e) (0.53 g) and aldehyde (6c) (0.25 g) were dissolved in DMF (16 mL) and sodium triacetoxyborohydride (0.96 g) added and the solution was stirred overnight at room temperature. The reaction mixture was quenched with 2N HCl, basified with sodium bicarbonate solution, and extracted with methanol-DCM to afford the free base of the title compound (0.25 g).
  • 1H NMR of the hydrochloride salt δH (d6-DMSO), 9.60 (2H, bs), 8.73 (1H, s), 8.20 (1H, s), 7.60 (1H, d), 7.45 (1H, d), 7.20 (1H, s), 4.50 (2H, m), 4.40 (4H, m), 4.32 (2H, m), 4.25 (2H, m), 3.90-3.70 (3H, m), 3.40-3.10 (6H, m), 2.35-2.05 (4H, m),
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 497 (MH+).
  • This material, as a solution in chloroform/methanol, was treated with an excess of 1M HCl in ether and evaporated to dryness. The solid was triturated under ether, filtered and dried under vacuum to provide the title compound (0.33 g).
    • Example 8 6-{[(1-{2-hydroxy-2-[2-(methyloxy)-8-quinolinyl]ethyl}4-piperidinyl)amino]methyl}-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]oxazin-3(4H)-one
  • Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00024
    (a) 8-(1-Butoxy-vinyl)-2-methoxy-quinoline
  • Triflate (2c) (2.50 g, 8.14 mmol) was dissolved in DMF (25 mL). After subsequent addition of butyl vinyl ether (4.21 mL, 32.55 mmol), palladium acetate (0.182 g, 0.81 mmol), 1,3-bis(diphenylphosphino)propane (0.334 g, 0.81 mmol), and N,N-diisopropylethylamine (4.25 mL, 24.4 mmol), the reaction was heated to 60° C. and stirred for 18 hours. The solution was then cooled to ambient temperature and poured into a saturated NaHCO3 solution. The solution was then extracted with EtOAc and washed with water (3×). The organic layer was then dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and the solvent removed under reduced pressure yielding an oil (2.80 g, >100% crude).1
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 258 (MH+).
  • (b) 2-Bromo-1-(2-methoxy-quinolin-8-yl)-ethanone
  • Vinyl (8a) (2.42 g, 9.42 mmol) was dissolved in THF (30 mL). Water (10 mL) was added followed by N-bromosuccinimide (1.84 g, 10.36 mmol) at ambient temperature. Immediately after addition, the color changed to a lighter color. The reaction was stirred 10 minutes, filtered, and the solvent removed under reduced pressure. This was chromatographed on silica gel (CH2Cl2) to yield a yellow solid (1.25 g, 47%).
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 280 (MH+).
  • (c) {1-[2-(2-Methoxy-quinolin-8-yl)-2-oxo-ethyl]-piperidin-4-yl}-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester.
  • Piperidin-4-yl-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (0.356 g, 1.78 mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (5.0 mL). Triethylamine (0.52 mL, 3.75 mmol) was added and the solution stirred for 15 minutes at ambient temperature. In a separate flask, bromomethyl (8b) (0.50 g, 1.78 mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (5.0 mL), and then added to the original solution. The reaction mixture was allowed to stir at ambient temperature for 18 hours. The solution was then diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with water and saturated aqueous NaCl solution. The organic layer was then dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and the solvent removed under reduced pressure. The reaction yielded an off-white solid (0.501 g, 70%).
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 400 (MH+).
  • (d) {1-[2-Hydroxy-2-(2-methoxy-quinolin-8-yl)-ethyl]-piperidin-4-yl}-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester
  • The ketone (8c) (0.25 g, 0.627 mmol) was dissolved in tetrahydrofuran (10 mL) and the solution cooled to 0° C. NaBH4 (0.024 g, 0.627 mmol) was added and the solution stirred at 0° C. for 2 hours and allowed to warm to ambient temperature overnight. The reaction was not complete, and thus another equivalent of NaBH4 (0.024 g, 0.627 mmol) was added at 0° C. The solution was allowed to warm to ambient temperature and was stirred for 3 more hours. The reaction was quenched with saturated NaHCO3 solution and diluted with ethyl acetate. The organic layer was washed with water and saturated aqueous NaCl solution, dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and the solvent removed under reduced pressure. Purification by flash chromatography (silica gel, acetone/chloroform) yielded an off-white solid (0.162 g, 65%).
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 402.4 (MH+).
  • (e) (4-Amino-piperidin-1-yl)-1-(2-methoxy-quinolin-8-yl)-ethanol
  • The carbamate (8d) (0.158 g, 0.394 mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (2 mL). HCl in dioxane (1.0M:5 mL:5 mmol) was added and the solution allowed to stir at room temperature for 18 hours. The solvent and excess HCl were removed under reduced pressure, yielding the di-HCl salt (0.144 g, 98%) as a yellow solid.
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 302.4 (MH+).
  • (f) Title Compound
  • Amine (8e) (0.144 g, 0.482 mmol) was added to aldehyde (1j) (0.094 g, 0.530 mmol) dissolved in CH2Cl2 (3 mL) and MeOH (3 mL). NaHCO3 (0.202 g, 2.41 mmol) was then added and the solution allowed to stir at ambient temperature for 17 hours. The solution was cooled to 0° C., excess sodium borohydride was added, and it was allowed to stir at ambient temperature for 4 hours. The reaction mixture was poured into a saturated solution of NaHCO3 and extracted with CHCl3. (3×). The organic layer was washed with water (2×) and brine, dried over Na2SO4, and evaporated to yield a yellow oil. This was chromatographed on silica gel (90:10:1 CHCl3/MeOH/NH4OH) to yield an off-white solid (0.012 g, 5%).
  • 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.98 (d, 1H), 7.84 (d, 1H), 7.62 (d, 1H), 7.39 (t, 1H), 7.20 (d, 1H), 6.94 (d, 1H), 6.89 (d, 1H), 5.77 (dd, 1H), 4.63 (s, 3H), 4.02 (s, 3H), 3.84 (s, 2H), 3.15 (d, 1H), 3.01 (d, 1H), 2.59 (m, 2H), 2.38 (m, 1H), 2.21 (m, 1H); 1.97 (m, 2H); 1.58 (m, 2H).
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 464.4 (MH+).
    • Example 9 6-[({1-[2-(4-quinolinyl)ethyl]-4-piperidinyl}amino)methyl]-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-3(4H)-one dihydrochloride
  • Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00025
    (a) 1,1-dimethylethyl {1-[2-(4-quinolinyl)ethyl]-4-piperidinyl}carbamate
  • A solution of lepidine (2.5 mmol, 0.33 mL), 1,1-dimethylethyl 4-piperidinylcarbamate (2.5 mmol, 0.500 g), 37% aqueous formaldehyde (2.6 mmol, 0.20 mL), and 6N HCl (2.6 mmol, 0.44 mL) in ethanol (1 mL) was heated to 50° C. overnight. The reaction mixture was cooled, diluted with chloroform, and washed with aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution. The aqueous layer was removed and the organic layer was washed with water and brine, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, concentrated and chromatographed in 90:10:1 chloroform:methanol:ammonium hydroxide to afford the product as a white solid (278 mg, 31%).
  • LC-MS m/z 356 (MH+)
  • (b) 1-[2-(4-quinolinyl)ethyl]-4-piperidinamine trihydrochloride
  • 1,1-dimethylethyl {1-[2-(4-quinolinyl)ethyl]-4-piperidinyl}carbamate (9a) (278 mg) was dissolved in chloroform and diluted with 4N HCl in dioxane solution. After stirring two hours, the reaction mixture was evaporated to dryness to afford the product as a solid (180 mg, 100%).
  • LC-MS m/z 286 (MH+)
  • (c) Title Compound
  • The trihydrochloride salt of amine (9b) (0.36 mmol, 180 mg) was dissolved in 3 mL of 1:1 dichloromethane:methanol and treated with sodium bicarbonate (1.8 mmol, 152 mg) and carbaldehyde (2o) (0.36 mmol, 70 mg) and stirred overnight. The suspension was treated with sodium triacetoxyborohydride (0.54 mmol, 114 mg) and stirred overnight. The resulting reaction mixture was diluted with dichloromethane and poured into saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate. The aqueous layer was extracted with dichloromethane, and the combined organic layers were washed with water and brine, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, concentrated, and chromatographed in 90:10:1 chloroform:methanol:ammonium hydroxide. The final product was obtained in 34% yield, 52 mg and converted to dihydrochloride salt.
  • δH (CDCl3, 400 MHz), 8.81 (d, 1H), 8.11 (d, 1H), 8.09 (bs, 1H), 8.06(d, 1H), 7.70 (t, 1H), 7.63-7.55 (m, 2H), 7.28 (s, 1H), 6.99 (d, 1H), 3.85 (s, 2H), 3.43 (s, 2H), 3.28 (t, 2H), 3.04 (m, 2H), 2.73 (t, 2H), 2.56 (m, 1H), 2.17 (m, 1H), 1.95 (m, 1H), 1.64-1.52 (m, 2H)
  • MS (ES) m/e 434 (M+H)+.
    • Example 10 4-[2-(3-hydroxy-4-{[(3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]oxazin-6-yl)methyl]amino}-1-piperidinyl)ethyl]-6-quinolinecarbonitrile dihydrochloride (isomer E2)
  • Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00026
    (a) cis-4-tert-Butoxycarbonylamino-3-hydroxy-piperidine-1-carboxylic acid benzyl ester.
  • Racemic cis-4-tert-butoxycarbonylamino-3-hydroxy-piperidine-1-carboxylic acid benzyl ester was prepared according to the procedure outlined by Kim et al. [Syn. Comm. 2001, 31, 1081-1089] starting from 3,6-dihydro-2H-pyridine-1-carboxylic acid benzyl ester.
  • MS (ES) m/z 351 (M+H)+.
  • (b) cis-4-tert-Butoxycarbonylamino-3-hydroxy-piperidine-1-carboxylic acid benzyl ester enantiomer 1 and cis-4-tert-Butoxycarbonylamino-3-hydroxy-piperidine-1-carboxylic acid benzyl ester enantiomer 2
  • 71.0 g of the racemate (10a) was dissolved in methanol (710 mL) and resolved through multiple injections (1×8 g substrate injection; 5×10 g substrate injection; 1×7 g substrate injection; and 1×6 g substrate injection) on a Chiralpak AD column (77×250 mm) eluting with 100% methanol at a flow rate of 280 mL/minute with UV detection at 254 nm. 31.15 g of cis-4-tert-butoxycarbonylamino-3-hydroxy-piperidine-1-carboxylic acid benzyl ester fast running isomer (>99% ee, retention time 3.8 minutes (sharp), designated Isomer 1) and 26.75 g of cis-4-tert-butoxycarbonylamino-3-hydroxy-piperidine-1-carboxylic acid benzyl ester slow running isomer (>99% ee, retention time 8.0 minutes (very broad), designated Isomer 2) were obtained.
  • (c) cis-(3-Hydroxy-piperidin-4-yl)-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester isomer 2
  • 10.0 g of cis-4-tert-Butoxycarbonylamino-3-hydroxy-piperidine-1-carboxylic acid benzyl ester slow running Isomer 2 (10b), was dissolved in methanol (350 mL) and was degassed. Pearlman's catalyst (palladium hydroxide on carbon, 20wt % Pd (dry basis), ≦50% water, 500 mg) was added and the mixture was purged with hydrogen and stirring continued under a balloon of hydrogen for 12 hours. The mixture was degassed with argon, filtered through a pad of Celite, and evaporated to dryness to afford 6.2 g (100%) of a white solid.
  • MS (ES) m/z 217 (M+H)+.
  • (d) 1,1-dimethylethyl {(3R,4S)-1-[2-(6-cyano-4-quinolinyl)ethyl]-3-hydroxy-4-piperidinyl}carbamate
  • A mixture of the vinyl-quinoline (1d) and piperidine (10c) was treated as in example (7d) to afford the desired product in 86% yield.
  • MS (ES) m/z 397 (M+H)+.
  • (e) 4-{2-[(3R,4S)-4-amino-3-hydroxy-1-piperidinyl]ethyl}-6-quinolinecarbonitrile dihydrochloride
  • The carbamate (10d) was dissolved in dichloromethane. 4M HCl in dioxane was added and the solution allowed to stir at room temperature for 18 hours. The solvent and excess HCl were removed under reduced pressure, yielding the di-HCl salt as a yellow solid.
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 297 (MH+).
  • (f) Title Compound
  • The dihydrochloride salt (10e) (1.4 mmol, 650 mg) was dissolved in 3 mL methanol and diluted with 9 mL dichloromethane. The solution was treated with triethylamine (7.1 mmol, 0.99 mL) and aldehyde (1j) (1.4 mmol, 253 mg) and stirred overnight. The resulting solution was treated with sodium borohydride (1.4 mmol, 54 mg) and stirred two hours. The reaction mixture was diluted with chloroform and poured into saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution. The aqueous layer was extracted with chloroform, and the combined organic layers were washed with brine, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, concentrated, and chromatographed in 90:10:1 chloroform:methanol:ammonium hydroxide to afford the product a solid (394 mg, 60%).
  • δH (DMSO, 400 MHz), 8.94 (d, 1H), 8.81 (d, 1H), 8.15 (d, 1H), 8.05 (d, 1H), 7.58 (t, 1H), 7.30 (d, 1H), 7.02 (d, 1H), 4.61 (s, 2H), 4.43 (bs, 1H), 3.70 (m, 3H), 3.29 (t, 2H), 2.66 (t, 3H), 2.60 (bs, 1H), 2.39 (m, 1H), 2.28 (m, 1H), 2.00 (m, 1H), 1.66 (m, 1H), 1.52 (m, 1H)
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 459 (MH+).
  • This material was converted to the dihydrochloride salt by the procedure of example (2p)
    • Example 11 4-[2-(3-hydroxy-4-{([(3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-6-yl)methyl]amino}-1-piperidinyl)ethyl]-6-quinolinecarbonitrile dihydrochloride (E2 isomer)
  • Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00027
    (a) Title Compound
  • Dihydrochloride (10e) (1.4 mmol, 650 mg) was dissolved in 3 mL methanol and diluted with 9 mL dichloromethane. The solution was treated with triethylamine (7.1 mmol, 0.99 mL) and aldehyde (2o) (1.4 mmol, 345 mg, at 80% purity) and stirred overnight. The resulting solution was treated with sodium borohydride (1.4 mmol, 54 mg) and stirred two hours. The reaction mixture was diluted with chloroform and poured into saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution. The aqueous layer was extracted with chloroform, and the combined organic layers were washed with brine, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, concentrated, and chromatographed in 90:10:1 chloroform:methanol:ammonium hydroxide to afford the product as a solid (405 mg, 60%).
  • δH (DMSO, 400 MHz), 10.91 (bs, 1H), 8.94 (d, 1H), 8.81 (d, 1H), 8.15 (d, 1H), 8.04 (d, 1H), 7.73 (d, 1H), 7.58 (d, 1H), 7.10 (d, 1H), 4.43 (bs, 1H), 3.72 (m, 3H), 3.53 (s, 1H), 3.28 (t, 2H), 3.17 (d, 1H), 2.66 (t, 1H), 2.60 (bs, 1H), 2.39 (m, 1H), 2.27 (m, 1H), 2.06 (m, 1H), 1.66 (m, 1H), 1.52 (m, 1H)
  • MS (+ve ion electrospray) m/z 475 (MH+).
  • This material was converted to the dihydrochloride salt by the procedure of example (2p)
    • Example 12 4-[2-(3-hydroxy-4-{[(3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]oxazin-6-yl)methyl]amino}-1-piperidinyl)ethyl]-6-quinolinecarbonitrile (E1 isomer)
  • Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00028
    (a) Title Compound
  • Carbonitrile dihydrochloride (10e) (492 mg, 1.48 mmole), aldehyde (1j) (264 mg, 1.48 mmole) and triethylamine(1.03 mL, 7.42 mmole) were combined in a 1:1 mixture of dichloromethane and methanol (20 mL), and the mixture was stirred for 3 hours. Sodium borohydride (56 mg, 1.48 mmole) were added, and the reaction was stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes. The solution was diluted with chloroform, then washed with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuo to yield an off-white solid. This was flash chromatographed on silica gel (90:10:1 CHCl3/MeOH/NH4OH) to yield the title compound (450 mg, 57%) as a white solid.
  • 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO) δ 8.96 (d, 1H), 8.79 (s, 1H), 8.31 (s, 1H), 8.17 (d, 1H), 8.08 (d, 1H), 7.70 (d, 1H), 7.55 (s, 1H), 7.01 (d, 1H), 4.60 (s, 2H), 4.45 (m, 1H), 3.76-3.80 (m, 3H), 3.24-3.37 (m, 2H), 2.59-2.79 (m, 4H), 2.40-2.50 (m, 1H), 2.20-2.35 (m, 1H), 1.65-1.78 (m, 1H), 1.42-1.60 (m, 1H), 1.00-1.13 (m, 2H)
  • MS (ES) m/e 459.5 (M+H)+.
  • This material was converted to the dihydrochloride salt by the procedure of example (2p)
    • Example 13 4-[2-(3-hydroxy-4-{[(3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-6-yl)methyl]amino}-1-piperidinyl)ethyl]-6-quinolinecarbonitrile (E1 isomer)
  • Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00029
    (a) Title Compound
  • Carbonitrile dihydrochloride (10e) (492 mg, 1.48 mmole), aldehyde (2o) (287 mg, 1.48 mmole) and triethylamine(1.03 mL, 7.42 mmole) were combined in a 1:1 mixture of dichloromethane and methanol (20 mL), and the mixture was stirred for 3 hours. Sodium borohydride (56 mg, 1.48 mmole) were added, and the reaction was stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes. The reaction was diluted with chloroform, then washed with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution and brine. The organic layer was dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated in vacuo to yield an off-white solid. This was flash chromatographed on silica gel (90:10:1 CHCl3/MeOH/NH4OH) to yield the title compound (230 mg, 28%) as a white solid.
  • 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO)δ10.91 (s, 1H), 8.95 (d, 1H), 8.81 (s, 1H), 8.32 (s, 1H), 8.15 (d, 1H), 8.04 (d, 1H), 7.74 (d, 1H), 7.59 (s, 1H), 7.10 (d, 1H), 4.45 (m, 1H), 3.70-3.78 (s, 3H), 3.51 (s, 2H), 3.28-3.34 (m, 2H), 2.66-2.79 (m, 4H), 2.42-2.50 (m, 1H), 2.25-2.35 (m, 1H), 1.68-1.80 (m, 1H), 1.43-1.60 (m, 1H), 1.08-1.13 (m, 2H)
  • MS (ES) m/e 475.5 (M+H)+.
  • This material was converted to the dihydrochloride salt by the procedure of example (2p)
  • Biological Activity
  • The MIC (μg/ml) of test compounds against various organisms was determined including: S. epidermidis CL7, S. aureus WCUH29, S. pneumoniae 1629, S. pyogenes CN10, H. influenzae ATCC 49247, E. faecalis 2, M. catarrhalis Ravasio, E. coli 7623. Examples 1, 5, 6, 7, 8, 11, 13 have an MIC≦2 μg/ml versus all these organisms. Examples 4, 10, 12 have an MIC≦16 μg/ml versus all these organisms. Example 9 has an MIC≦16 μg/ml versus some of these organisms.

Claims (13)

1-16. (canceled)
17. A compound of formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof:
Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00030
wherein:
RA is an optionally substituted bicyclic carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring system of structure:
Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00031
containing 0-3 heteroatoms in each ring in which:
at least one of rings (x) and (y) is aromatic;
one of Z4 and Z5 is C or N and the other is C;
Z3 is N, NR13, O, S(O)x, CO, CR1 or CR1R1a;
Z1 and Z2 are independently a 2 or 3 atom linker group each atom of which is independently selected from N, NR13, O, S(O)x, CO, CR1 and CR1R1a;
such that each ring is independently substituted with 0-3 groups R1 and/or R1a;
one of Z1, Z2, Z3, Z4 and Z5 is N, one is CR1a and the remainder are CH, or one of Z1, Z2, Z3, Z4 and Z5 is CR1a and the remainder are CH;
R1 and R1a are independently hydrogen; hydroxy; (C1-6)alkoxy optionally substituted by (C1-6)alkoxy, amino, piperidyl, guanidino or amidino any of which is optionally N-substituted by one or two (C1-6)alkyl, acyl or (C1-6)alkylsulphonyl groups, CONH2, hydroxy, (C1-6)alkylthio, heterocyclylthio, heterocyclyloxy, arylthio, aryloxy, acylthio, acyloxy or (C1-6)alkylsulphonyloxy; (C1-6)alkoxy-substituted(C1-6)alkyl; hydroxy (C1-6)alkyl; halogen; (C1-6)alkyl; (C1-6)alkylthio; trifluoromethyl; trifluoromethoxy; cyano; carboxy; nitro; azido; acyl; acyloxy; acylthio; (C1-6)alkylsulphonyl; (C1-6)alkylsulphoxide; arylsulphonyl; arylsulphoxide or an amino, piperidyl, guanidino or amidino group optionally N-substituted by one or two (C1-6)alkyl, acyl or (C1-6)alkylsulphonyl groups, or when Z3 and the adjacent atom are CR1 and CR1a, R1 and R1a may together represent (C1-2)alkylenedioxy; provided that R1 and R1a, on the same carbon atom are not both optionally substituted hydroxy or amino;
provided that
(i) when RA is optionally substituted quinolin-4-yl:
it is unsubstituted in the 6-position; or
it is substituted by at least one hydroxy (C1-6)alkyl, cyano or carboxy group at the 2-, 5-, 6-, 7- or 8-position; or
it is substituted by at least one trifluoromethoxy group; or
R1 and R1a together represent (C1-2)alkylenedioxy;
(ii) when RA is optionally substituted quinazolin-4-yl, cinnolin-4-yl, 1,5-naphthyridin-4-yl, 1,7-naphthyridin-4-yl or 1,8-naphthyridin-4-yl:
it is substituted by at least one hydroxy (C1-6)alkyl, cyano or carboxy group at the 2-, 5-, 6-, 7- or 8-position as available; or
it is substituted by at least one trifluoromethoxy group; or
R1 and R1a together represent (C1-2)alkylenedioxy;
R2 is hydrogen, or (C1-4)alkyl or (C2-4)alkenyl optionally substituted with 1 to 3 groups selected from:
amino optionally substituted by one or two (C1-4)alkyl groups; carboxy; (C1-4)alkoxycarbonyl; (C1-4)alkylcarbonyl; (C2-4)alkenyloxycarbonyl; (C2-4)alkenylcarbonyl; aminocarbonyl wherein the amino group is optionally substituted by hydroxy, (C1-4)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-4)alkyl, aminocarbonyl(C1-4)alkyl, (C2-4)alkenyl, (C1-4)alkylsulphonyl, trifluoromethylsulphonyl, (C2-4)alkenylsulphonyl, (C1-4)alkoxycarbonyl, (C1-4)alkylcarbonyl, (C2-4)alkenyloxycarbonyl or (C2-4)alkenylcarbonyl; cyano; tetrazolyl; 2-oxo-oxazolidinyl optionally substituted by R10; 3-hydroxy-3-cyclobutene-1,2-dione-4-yl; 2,4-thiazolidinedione-5-yl; tetrazol-5-ylaminocarbonyl; 1,2,4-triazol-5-yl optionally substituted by R10; 5-oxo-1,2,4-oxadiazol-3-yl; halogen; (C1-4)alkylthio; trifluoromethyl; hydroxy optionally substituted by (C1-4)alkyl, (C2-4)alkenyl, (C1-4)alkoxycarbonyl, (C1-4)alkylcarbonyl, (C2-4)alkenyloxycarbonyl, (C2-4)alkenylcarbonyl; oxo; (C1-4)alkylsulphonyl; (C2-4)alkenylsulphonyl; or (C1-4)aminosulphonyl wherein the amino group is optionally substituted by (C1-4)alkyl or (C2-4)alkenyl;
R3 is hydrogen; or
R3 is in the 2-, 3- or 4-position and is:
trifluoromethyl; carboxy; (C1-6)alkoxycarbonyl; (C2-6)alkenyloxycarbonyl; aminocarbonyl wherein the amino group is optionally substituted by hydroxy, (C1-6)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-6)alkyl, aminocarbonyl(C1-6)alkyl, (C2-6)alkenyl, (C1-6)alkylsulphonyl, trifluoromethylsulphonyl, (C2-6)alkenylsulphonyl, (C1-6)alkoxycarbonyl, (C1-6)alkylcarbonyl, (C2-6)alkenyloxycarbonyl or (C2-6)alkenylcarbonyl and optionally further substituted by (C1-6)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-6)alkyl, aminocarbonyl(C1-6)alkyl or (C2-6)alkenyl; cyano; tetrazolyl; 2-oxo-oxazolidinyl optionally substituted by R10; 3-hydroxy-3-cyclobutene-1,2-dione-4-yl; 2,4-thiazolidinedione-5-yl; tetrazol-5-ylaminocarbonyl; 1,2,4-triazol-5-yl optionally substituted by R10; or 5-oxo-1,2,4-oxadiazol-3-yl; or
(C1-4)alkyl or ethenyl optionally substituted with any of the substituents listed above for R3 and/or 0 to 2 groups R12 independently selected from:
halogen; (C1-6)alkylthio; trifluoromethyl; (C1-6)alkoxycarbonyl; (C1-6)alkylcarbonyl; (C2-6)alkenyloxycarbonyl; (C2-6)alkenylcarbonyl; hydroxy optionally substituted by (C1-6)alkyl, (C2-6)alkenyl, (C1-6)alkoxycarbonyl, (C1-6)alkylcarbonyl, (C2-6)alkenyloxycarbonyl, (C2-6)alkenylcarbonyl or aminocarbonyl wherein the amino group is optionally substituted by (C1-6)alkyl, (C2-6)alkenyl, (C1-6)alkylcarbonyl or (C2-6)alkenylcarbonyl; amino optionally mono- or disubstituted by (C1-6)alkoxycarbonyl, (C1-6)alkylcarbonyl, (C2-6)alkenyloxycarbonyl, (C2-6)alkenylcarbonyl, (C1-6)alkyl, (C2-6)alkenyl, (C1-6)alkylsulphonyl, (C2-6)alkenylsulphonyl or aminocarbonyl wherein the amino group is optionally substituted by (C1-6)alkyl or (C2-6)alkenyl; aminocarbonyl wherein the amino group is optionally substituted by (C1-6)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-6)alkyl, aminocarbonyl(C1-6)alkyl, (C2-6)alkenyl, (C1-6)alkoxycarbonyl, (C1-6)alkylcarbonyl, (C2-6)alkenyloxycarbonyl or (C2-6)alkenylcarbonyl and optionally further substituted by (C1-6)alkyl, hydroxy(C1-6)alkyl, aminocarbonyl(C1-6)alkyl or (C2-6)alkenyl; oxo; (C1-6)alkylsulphonyl; (C2-6)alkenylsulphonyl; or (C1-6)aminosulphonyl wherein the amino group is optionally substituted by (C1-6)alkyl or (C2-6)alkenyl; or
R3 is in the 2-position and is oxo; or
R3 is in the 3-position and is fluorine, amino optionally substituted by a group selected from hydroxy, (C1-6)alkylsulphonyl, trifluoromethylsulphonyl, (C2-6)alkenylsulphonyl, (C1-6)alkylcarbonyl, (C2-6)alkenylcarbonyl, (C1-6)alkoxycarbonyl, (C2-6)alkenyloxycarbonyl, (C1-6)alkyl and (C2-6)alkenyl, wherein a (C1-6)alkyl or (C2-6)alkenyl moiety may be optionally substituted with up to 2 groups R12, or hydroxy optionally substituted as described above for R12 hydroxy; in addition when R3 is disubstituted with a hydroxy or amino containing substituent and carboxy containing substituent these may together form a cyclic ester or amide linkage, respectively;
R4 is a group -U-R5 where
U is selected from CO, SO2 and CH2 and
R5 is an optionally substituted bicyclic carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring system (A):
Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00032
containing up to four heteroatoms in each ring in which
at least one of rings (a)and (b) is aromatic;
X1 is C or N when part of an aromatic ring, or CR14 when part of a non-aromatic ring;
X2 is N, NR13, O, S(O)x, CO or CR14 when part of an aromatic or non-aromatic ring or may in addition be CR14R15 when part of a non aromatic ring;
X3 and X5 are independently N or C;
Y1 is a 0 to 4 atom linker group each atom of which is independently selected from N, NR13, O, S(O)x, CO and CR14 when part of an aromatic or non-aromatic ring or may additionally be CR14R15 when part of a non aromatic ring;
Y2 is a 2 to 6 atom linker group, each atom of Y2 being independently selected from N, NR13, O, S(O)x, CO, CR14 when part of an aromatic or non-aromatic ring or may additionally be CR14R15 when part of a non aromatic ring;
each of R14 and R15 is independently selected from: H; (C1-4)alkylthio; halo; carboxy(C1-4)alkyl; halo(C1-4)alkoxy; halo(C1-4)alkyl; (C1-4)alkyl; (C2-4)alkenyl; (C1-4)alkoxycarbonyl; formyl; (C1-4)alkylcarbonyl; (C2-4)alkenyloxycarbonyl; (C2-4)alkenylcarbonyl; (C1-4)alkylcarbonyloxy; (C1-4)alkoxycarbonyl(C1-4)alkyl; hydroxy; hydroxy(C1-4)alkyl; mercapto(C1-4)alkyl; (C1-4)alkoxy; nitro; cyano; carboxy; amino or aminocarbonyl optionally substituted as for corresponding substituents in R3; (C1-4)alkylsulphonyl; (C2-4)alkenylsulphonyl; or aminosulphonyl wherein the amino group is optionally mono- or di-substituted by (C1-4)alkyl or (C2-4)alkenyl; aryl; aryl(C1-4)alkyl; aryl(C1-4)alkoxy or
R14 and R15 may together represent oxo;
each R13 is independently H; trifluoromethyl; (C1-4)alkyl optionally substituted by hydroxy, (C1-6)alkoxy, (C1-6)alkylthio, halo or trifluoromethyl; (C2-4)alkenyl; aryl; aryl (C1-4)alkyl; arylcarbonyl; heteroarylcarbonyl; (C1-4)alkoxycarbonyl; (C1-4)alkylcarbonyl; formyl; (C1-6)alkylsulphonyl; or aminocarbonyl wherein the amino group is optionally substituted by (C1-4)alkoxycarbonyl, (C1-4)alkylcarbonyl, (C2-4)alkenyloxycarbonyl, (C2-4)alkenylcarbonyl, (C1-4)alkyl or (C2-4)alkenyl and optionally further substituted by (C1-4)alkyl or (C2-4)alkenyl;
each x is independently 0, 1 or 2
n is 0 and AB is NR11CO, CO—CR8R9, CR6R7—CO, NHR11—SO2, CR6R7—SO2 or CR6R7—CR8R9, provided that R8 and R9 are not optionally substituted hydroxy or amino and R6 and R8 do not represent a bond:
or n is 1 and AB is NR11CO, CO—CR8R9, CR6R7—CO, NR11SO2, CONR11, CR6R7—CR8R9, O—CR8R9 or NR11—CR8R9;
provided that R6 and R7, and R8 and R9 are not both optionally substituted hydroxy or amino;
and wherein:
each of R6, R7, R8 and R9 is independently selected from: H; (C1-6)alkoxy; (C1-6)alkylthio; halo; trifluoromethyl; azido; (C1-6)alkyl; (C2-6)alkenyl; (C1-6)alkoxycarbonyl; (C1-6)alkylcarbonyl; (C2-6)alkenyloxycarbonyl; (C2-6)alkenylcarbonyl; hydroxy, amino or aminocarbonyl optionally substituted as for corresponding substituents in R3; (C1-6)alkylsulphonyl; (C2-6)alkenylsulphonyl; or (C1-6)aminosulphonyl wherein the amino group is optionally substituted by (C1-6)alkyl or (C2-6)alkenyl;
or R6 and R8 together represent a bond and R7 and R9 are as above defined;
R10 is selected from (C1-4)alkyl; (C2-4)alkenyl and aryl any of which may be optionally substituted by a group R12 as defined above; carboxy; aminocarbonyl wherein the amino group is optionally substituted by hydroxy, (C1-6)alkyl, (C2-6)alkenyl, (C1-6)alkylsulphonyl, trifluoromethylsulphonyl, (C2-6)alkenylsulphonyl, (C1-6)alkoxycarbonyl, (C1-6)alkylcarbonyl, (C2-6)alkenyloxycarbonyl or (C2-6)alkenylcarbonyl and optionally further substituted by (C1-6)alkyl or (C2-6)alkenyl; and
R11 is hydrogen; trifluoromethyl, (C1-6)alkyl; (C2-6)alkenyl; (C1-6)alkoxycarbonyl; (C1-6)alkylcarbonyl; or aminocarbonyl wherein the amino group is optionally substituted by (C1-6)alkoxycarbonyl, (C1-6)alkylcarbonyl, (C2-6)alkenyloxycarbonyl, (C2-6)alkenylcarbonyl, (C1-6)alkyl or (C2-6)alkenyl and optionally further substituted by (C1-6)alkyl or (C2-6)alkenyl;
or where one of R3 and R6, R7, R8 or R9 contains a carboxy group and the other contains a hydroxy or amino group they may together form a cyclic ester or amide linkage.
18. A compound according to claim 17 wherein RA is optionally substituted isoquinolin-5-yl, quinolin-8-yl, thieno[3,2-b]pyridin-7-yl, 2,3-dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-b]pyridin-8-yl, quinoxalin-5-yl, isoquinolin-8-yl, [1,6]-naphthyridin-4-yl, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydroquinoxalin-5-yl or 1,2-dihydroisoquinoline-8-yl.
19. A compound according to claim 17 wherein R1 is H, methoxy, methyl, cyano or halogen and R1a is H.
20. A compound according to claim 17 wherein R3 is hydrogen; optionally substituted hydroxy; optionally substituted amino; halogen; (C1-4)alkoxycarbonyl; CONH2; 1-hydroxyalkyl; CH2CO2H; CH2CONH2; —CONHCH2CONH2; 1,2-dihydroxyalkyl; CH2CN; 2-oxo-oxazolidin-5-yl; or 2-oxo-oxazolidin-5-yl(C1-4alkyl).
21. A compound according to claim 17 wherein n is 0 and A and B are both CH2, A is CHOH and B is CH2 or A is NH and B is CO.
22. A compound according to claim 17 wherein -U- is —CH2—.
23. A compound according to claim 17 wherein the heterocyclic ring (A) having 8-11 ring atoms including 2-4 heteroatoms of which at least one is N or NR13 in which Y2 contains 2-3 heteroatoms, one of which is S and 1-2 are N, with one N bonded to X3 or the heterocyclic ring (A) has ring (a) aromatic selected from optionally substituted benzo and pyrido and ring (b) non aromatic and Y2 has 3-5 atoms, including a heteroatom bonded to X5 selected from O, S or NR13, where R13 is other than hydrogen, and NHCO bonded via N to X3, or O bonded to X3.
24. A compound according to claim 17 wherein R5 is selected from:
3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]oxazin-6-yl
3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-6-yl
7-chloro-3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-6-yl
7-fluoro-3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-6-yl
2,3-dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-yl.
25. A compound according to claim 17 selected from:
4-(2-{4-[(3-Oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]oxazin-6-ylmethyl)-amino]-piperidin-1-yl}-ethyl)-quinoline-6-carbonitrile 6-({(3R,4S)-3-Fluoro-1-[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(2-methoxy-quinolin-8-yl)-ethyl]-piperidin-4-ylamino}-methyl)-4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-3-one
6-({(3S,4R)-3-Fluoro-1-[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(2-methoxy-quinolin-8-yl)-ethyl]-piperidin-4-ylamino}-methyl)-4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-3-one
6-({(3R,4R)-3-Hydroxy-1-[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(2-methoxy-quinolin-8-yl)-ethyl]-piperidin-4-ylamino}-methyl)-4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-3-one
6-({(3S,4S)-3-Hydroxy-1-[(R)-2-hydroxy-2-(2-methoxy-quinolin-8-yl)-ethyl]-piperidin-4-ylamino}-methyl)-4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-3-one
6-({(3R,4S)-1-[2-(2,3-Dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-f]quinolin-10-yl)-ethyl]-3-fluoro-piperidin-4-ylamino}-methyl)-4H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-3-one
6-{[(1-{(2R/S)-2-hydroxy-2-[3-(methyloxy)-5-quinoxalinyl]ethyl}-4-piperidinyl)amino]methyl}-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-3(4H)-one
(1R/S)-2-{4-[(2,3-dihydro[1,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl)amino]-1-piperidinyl}-1-[3-(methyloxy)-5-quinoxalinyl]ethanol
{1-[2-(9-Chloro-2,3-dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-f]quinolin-10-yl)-ethyl]-piperidin-4-yl}-(2,3-dihydro-[1,4]dioxino[2,3-c]pyridin-7-ylmethyl)-amine 6-{[(1-(2-hydroxy-2-[2-(methyloxy)-8-quinolinyl]ethyl)-4-piperidinyl)amino]methyl}-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]oxazin-3(4H)-one
6-[({1-[2-(4-quinolinyl)ethyl]-4-piperidinyl}amino)methyl]-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-3(4H)-one
4-[2-(3-hydroxy-4-{[(3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]oxazin-6-yl)methyl]amino}-1-piperidinyl)ethyl]-6-quinolinecarbonitrile (isomer E2)
4-[2-(3-hydroxy-4-{[(3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-6-yl)methyl]amino}-1-piperidinyl)ethyl]-6-quinolinecarbonitrile (isomer E2)
4-[2-(3-hydroxy-4-{[(3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]oxazin-6-yl)methyl]amino}-1-piperidinyl)ethyl]-6-quinolinecarbonitrile (E1 isomer)
4-[2-(3-hydroxy-4-{[(3-oxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrido[3,2-b][1,4]thiazin-6-yl)methyl]amino}-1-piperidinyl)ethyl]-6-quinolinecarbonitrile (E1 isomer)
or a pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof.
26. A method of treatment of bacterial infections in mammals, particularly in man, which method comprises the administration to a mammal in need of such treatment an effective amount of a compound according to claim 17.
27. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound according to claim 17, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
28. A process for preparing a compound of formula (I) according to claim 17, or a pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof, which process comprises reacting a compound of formula (IV) with a compound of formula (V):
Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00033
wherein n is as defined in formula (I); Z1′, Z2′, Z3′, R1′, and R3′ are Z1, Z2, Z3, R1, and R3 as defined in formula (I) or groups convertible thereto; Z4 and Z5 are as defined in formula (I);
Q1 is NR2′R4′ or a group convertible thereto wherein R2′ and R4′ are R2 and R4 as defined in formula (I) or groups convertible thereto and Q2 is H or R3′ or Q1 and Q2 together form an optionally protected oxo group;
(i) X is A′-COW, Y is H and n is 0;
(ii) X is CR6═CR8R9, Y is H and n is 0;
(iii) X is oxirane, Y is H and n is 0;
(iv) X is N═C═O and Y is H and n is 0;
(v) one of X and Y is CO2Ry and the other is CH2CO2Rx;
(vi) X is CHR6R7 and Y is C(═O)R9;
(vii) X is CR7═PRz 3 and Y is C(═O)R9 and n=1;
(viii) X is C(═O)R7 and Y is CR9═PRz 3 and n=1;
(ix) Y is COW and X is NHR11′, NCO or NR11′ COW and n=0 or 1 or when n=1 X is COW and Y is NHR11′, NCO or NR11′ COW;
(x) X is NHR11′ and Y is C(═O)R8 and n=1;
(xi) X is NHR11′ and Y is CR8R9W and n=1;
(xii) X is NR11′COCH2W or NR11′SO2CH2W and Y is H and n=0;
(xiii) X is CR6R7SO2W and Y is H and n=0;
(xiv) X is W or OH and Y is CH2OH and n is 1;
(xv) X is NHR11′ and Y is SO2W or X is NR11′SO2W and Y is H, and n is 0;
(xvi) X is W and Y is CONHR11′;
(xvii) X is —CH═CH2 and Y is H and n=0;
in which W is a leaving group, e.g. halo, methanesulphonyloxy, trifluoromethanesulphonyloxy or imidazolyl; Rx and Ry are (C1-6)alkyl; Rz is aryl or (C1-6)alkyl; A′ and NR11′ are A and NR11 as defined in formula (I), or groups convertible thereto; and oxirane is:
Figure US20060058287A1-20060316-C00034
wherein R6, R8 and R9 are as defined in formula (I);
and thereafter optionally or as necessary converting Q1 and Q2 to NR2′R4′;
converting A′, Z1′, Z2′, Z3′, R1′, R2′, R3′, R4′ and NR11′; to A, Z1, Z2, Z3, R1, R2, R3, R4 and NR11; converting A-B to other A-B, interconverting R1, R2, R3 and/or R4, and/or forming a pharmaceutically acceptable derivative thereof.
US10/518,655 2002-06-26 2003-06-25 Compounds Expired - Fee Related US7498326B2 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US10/518,655 US7498326B2 (en) 2002-06-26 2003-06-25 Compounds

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US39171002P 2002-06-26 2002-06-26
PCT/EP2003/006754 WO2004002490A2 (en) 2002-06-26 2003-06-25 Piperidine compounds as antibacterials
US10/518,655 US7498326B2 (en) 2002-06-26 2003-06-25 Compounds

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20060058287A1 true US20060058287A1 (en) 2006-03-16
US7498326B2 US7498326B2 (en) 2009-03-03

Family

ID=30000740

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/518,655 Expired - Fee Related US7498326B2 (en) 2002-06-26 2003-06-25 Compounds

Country Status (7)

Country Link
US (1) US7498326B2 (en)
EP (1) EP1583537A3 (en)
JP (1) JP2006505505A (en)
AR (1) AR040336A1 (en)
AU (1) AU2003238054A1 (en)
TW (1) TW200409637A (en)
WO (1) WO2004002490A2 (en)

Cited By (27)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20050159411A1 (en) * 2002-01-29 2005-07-21 Daines Robert A. Aminopiperidine derivatives
US20060041123A1 (en) * 2002-12-18 2006-02-23 Axten Jeffrey M Antibacterial agents
US20060116512A1 (en) * 2002-12-04 2006-06-01 Axten Jeffrey M Quinolines and nitrogenated derivatives thereof and their use as antibacterial agents
US20060166977A1 (en) * 2002-11-05 2006-07-27 Axten Jeffrey M Antibacterial agents
US20060189604A1 (en) * 2002-06-26 2006-08-24 Axten Jeffrey M Compounds
US20070254872A1 (en) * 2004-07-08 2007-11-01 Glaxo Group Limited Antibacterial Agents
US20070287701A1 (en) * 2004-06-15 2007-12-13 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Antibacterial Agents
US20080009483A1 (en) * 2005-01-25 2008-01-10 Glaxo Group Limited Antibacterial Agents
US20080139539A1 (en) * 2005-01-25 2008-06-12 Glaxo Group Limited Antibacterial Agents
US20080139540A1 (en) * 2005-01-25 2008-06-12 Glaxo Group Limited Antibacterial Agents
US20080146551A1 (en) * 2005-01-25 2008-06-19 William Henry Miller Antibacterial Agents
WO2008079255A1 (en) * 2006-12-20 2008-07-03 Janssen Pharmaceutica N.V. Synthesis of unsaturated piperidines from piperidones with a silyl reagent
US20080221110A1 (en) * 2005-10-21 2008-09-11 Nathalie Cailleau Compounds
US20080234256A1 (en) * 2005-01-25 2008-09-25 Glaxo Group Limited Antibacterial Agents
US20090054418A1 (en) * 2006-04-06 2009-02-26 William Henry Miller Antibacterial Agents
US20090105249A1 (en) * 2004-10-14 2009-04-23 Euro-Celtique S.A. 4-phenylsulfonamidopiperidines as calcium channel blockers
US20090239910A1 (en) * 2006-03-29 2009-09-24 Zhengning Chen Benzenesulfonamide Compounds and Their Use
US7618959B2 (en) 2002-11-05 2009-11-17 Smithklinebeecham Corp Antibacterial agents
US20090306136A1 (en) * 2006-04-13 2009-12-10 Akira Matsumura Benzenesulfonamide Compounds and the Use Thereof
US20100022595A1 (en) * 2006-04-13 2010-01-28 Purdue Pharma L.P. Benzenesulfonamide Compounds and Their Use as Blockers of Calcium Channels
US7723330B2 (en) 2006-03-07 2010-05-25 Array Biopharma Inc. Heterobicyclic pyrazole compounds and methods of use
US20100137282A1 (en) * 2007-04-20 2010-06-03 David Evan Davies Tricyclic nitrogen containing compounds as antibacterial agents
US20100311792A1 (en) * 2007-09-28 2010-12-09 Bin Shao Benzenesulfonamide Compounds and the Use Thereof
US20110015174A1 (en) * 2007-08-01 2011-01-20 University Health Network Cyclic inhibitors of carnitine palmitoyltransferase and treating cancer
US8399486B2 (en) 2007-04-09 2013-03-19 Purdue Pharma L.P. Benzenesulfonyl compounds and the use thereof
US8410150B2 (en) 2007-03-09 2013-04-02 University Health Network Inhibitors of carnitine palmitoyltransferase and treating cancer
US8575351B2 (en) 2009-06-04 2013-11-05 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Active metabolite of a thrombin receptor antagonist

Families Citing this family (46)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP1470131A2 (en) 2002-01-29 2004-10-27 Glaxo Group Limited Aminopiperidine compounds, process for their preparation, and pharmaceutical compositions containing them
TW200526626A (en) 2003-09-13 2005-08-16 Astrazeneca Ab Chemical compounds
EA011277B1 (en) 2004-01-23 2009-02-27 Янссен Фармацевтика Н.В. Quinoline derivatives and use thereof as mycobacterial inhibitors
WO2006017468A2 (en) 2004-08-02 2006-02-16 Glaxo Group Limited Antibacterial agents
JP4887297B2 (en) * 2004-09-24 2012-02-29 アクテリオン ファーマシューティカルズ リミテッド New bicyclic antibiotics
DE602005021133D1 (en) * 2004-10-05 2010-06-17 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd NEW PIPERIDINE ANTIBIOTICS
JP5314244B2 (en) * 2004-10-27 2013-10-16 富山化学工業株式会社 Novel nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compounds and salts thereof
JP4058106B2 (en) 2005-02-18 2008-03-05 アストラゼネカ アクチボラグ Antibacterial piperidine derivatives
WO2006099884A1 (en) * 2005-03-24 2006-09-28 Actelion Percurex Ag Beta-aminoalcohol antibiotics
MY150958A (en) * 2005-06-16 2014-03-31 Astrazeneca Ab Compounds for the treatment of multi-drug resistant bacterial infections
EP1900732A4 (en) * 2005-06-24 2009-11-18 Toyama Chemical Co Ltd NOVEL HETEROCYCLIC NITROGENIC COMPOUND AND SALT THEREOF
JO2855B1 (en) * 2005-08-03 2015-03-15 شركة جانسين فارماسوتيكا ان. في Qunioline Derivatives as Antibacterial Agents
JO2952B1 (en) * 2005-08-03 2016-03-15 جانسين فارماسوتيكا ان. في Quinoline Derivatives as Antibacterial Agents
JO2837B1 (en) * 2005-08-03 2014-09-15 جانسن فارمسيتكا ان في Quinoline Derivatives as Antibacterial Agents
EP1943222A1 (en) * 2005-10-13 2008-07-16 Morphochem Aktiengesellschaft Für Kombinatorische Chemie Antibacterial active 5-chinolin derivative
ATE536351T1 (en) 2006-01-26 2011-12-15 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd TETRAHYDROPYRAN ANTIBIOTICS
EP2001887B1 (en) 2006-04-06 2010-09-15 Glaxo Group Limited Pyrrolo-quinoxalinone derivatives as antibacterials
AU2007268749B2 (en) 2006-05-26 2012-07-26 Taisho Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Novel heterocyclic compound or salt thereof and intermediate thereof
JP2009539807A (en) * 2006-06-09 2009-11-19 グラクソ グループ リミテッド Substituted 1-methyl-1H-quinolin-2-one and 1-methyl-1H-1,5-naphthyridin-2-one as antibacterial agents
GB0613208D0 (en) 2006-07-03 2006-08-09 Glaxo Group Ltd Compounds
EP1992628A1 (en) 2007-05-18 2008-11-19 Glaxo Group Limited Derivatives and analogs of N-ethylquinolones and N-ethylazaquinolones
TW200819457A (en) 2006-08-30 2008-05-01 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd Spiro antibiotic derivatives
TW200831517A (en) 2006-12-15 2008-08-01 Astrazeneca Ab Chemical compounds
US20100144717A1 (en) * 2006-12-15 2010-06-10 Janelle Comita-Prevoir 2-quinolinone and 2-quinoxalinone-derivatives and their use as antibacterial agents
WO2008071981A1 (en) * 2006-12-15 2008-06-19 Astrazeneca Ab Piperidines for the treatment of bacterial infections
CL2008001003A1 (en) 2007-04-11 2008-10-17 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd COMPOUNDS DERIVED FROM OXAZOLIDINONA; PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION THAT INCLUDES SUCH COMPOUNDS; AND ITS USE TO PREPARE A MEDICINAL PRODUCT TO TREAT A BACTERIAL INFECTION.
CL2008001002A1 (en) 2007-04-11 2008-10-17 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd COMPOUNDS DERIVED FROM OXAZOLIDINONA; PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION THAT INCLUDES SUCH COMPOUNDS; AND ITS USE TO PREPARE A MEDICINAL PRODUCT TO TREAT A BACTERIAL INFECTION.
CN101874032B (en) 2007-11-26 2013-02-06 富山化学工业株式会社 Novel naphthyridine derivative monohydrate and method for producing the same
PL2245028T3 (en) 2007-12-18 2012-07-31 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd 5-aminocyclylmethyl-oxazolidin-2-one derivatives
EP2080761A1 (en) 2008-01-18 2009-07-22 Glaxo Group Limited Compounds
ES2411930T3 (en) 2008-02-20 2013-07-09 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd. Azatricyclic antibiotic compounds
TW200944529A (en) 2008-04-15 2009-11-01 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd Tricyclic antibiotics
JP2010209058A (en) 2008-09-29 2010-09-24 Sumitomo Chemical Co Ltd Process for producing 1-substituted trans-4-(substituted amino)piperidin-3-ol
DK2344495T3 (en) 2008-10-07 2015-02-02 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd TRICYCLIC OXAZOLIDINON ANTIBIOTIC COMPOUNDS
EP2352734A1 (en) 2008-10-17 2011-08-10 Glaxo Group Limited Tricyclic nitrogen compounds used as antibacterials
AU2009325902B2 (en) * 2008-12-12 2015-01-29 Idorsia Pharmaceuticals Ltd 5-amino-2-(1-hydroxy-ethyl)-tetrahydropyran derivatives
US8318940B2 (en) 2009-01-15 2012-11-27 Glaxo Group Limited Naphthyridin-2 (1 H)-one compounds useful as antibacterials
PL395470A1 (en) 2011-06-29 2013-01-07 Adamed Spólka Z Ograniczona Odpowiedzialnoscia Alicyclic amines sulfonamide derivatives for the treatment of diseases of the central nervous system
US10702521B2 (en) 2014-08-22 2020-07-07 Glaxosmithkline Intellectual Property Development Limited Methods for treating neisseria gonorrhoeae infection with substituted 1,2-dihydro-2A,5,8A-triazaacenaphthylene-3,8-diones
TW201722965A (en) 2015-08-16 2017-07-01 葛蘭素史密斯克藍智慧財產發展有限公司 Compounds for use in antibacterial applications
LT3483164T (en) 2017-03-20 2020-05-11 Forma Therapeutics, Inc. Pyrrolopyrrole compositions as pyruvate kinase (pkr) activators
EP3852791B1 (en) 2018-09-19 2024-07-03 Novo Nordisk Health Care AG Activating pyruvate kinase r
EP3853206B1 (en) 2018-09-19 2024-04-10 Novo Nordisk Health Care AG Treating sickle cell disease with a pyruvate kinase r activating compound
US12479816B2 (en) 2019-02-08 2025-11-25 University of Pittsburgh—of the Commonwealth System of Higher Education 20-HETE formation inhibitors
HRP20251148T1 (en) 2019-09-19 2025-11-21 Novo Nordisk Health Care Ag PREPARATIONS THAT ACTIVATE PYRUVATE KINASE R (PKR)
US12128035B2 (en) 2021-03-19 2024-10-29 Novo Nordisk Health Care Ag Activating pyruvate kinase R

Citations (32)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5310743A (en) * 1991-08-12 1994-05-10 Ciba-Geigy Corp. 1-acylpiperidine compounds
US5610157A (en) * 1989-03-22 1997-03-11 Janssen Pharmaceutica N.V. N-(3-hydroxy-4-piperidinyl) (dihydrobenzofuran, dihydro-2H-benzopyran or dihydrobenzo-dioxin) carboxamide derivatives
US5932590A (en) * 1996-12-05 1999-08-03 Merck & Co., Inc. Inhibitors of farnesyl-protein transferase
US6323217B2 (en) * 2000-01-13 2001-11-27 Adir Et Compagnie Piperidine-4 sulphonamide compounds
US6403610B1 (en) * 1999-09-17 2002-06-11 Aventis Pharma S.A. Quinolylpropylpiperidine derivatives, their preparation and the compositions which comprise them
US6602884B2 (en) * 2001-03-13 2003-08-05 Aventis Pharma S.A. Quinolylpropylpiperidine derivatives, their preparation, and compositions containing them
US6602882B1 (en) * 1998-10-14 2003-08-05 Smithkline Beecham P.L.C. Quinoline derivatives and their use as antibacterial agents
US6603005B2 (en) * 2000-11-15 2003-08-05 Aventis Pharma S.A. Heterocyclylalkylpiperidine derivatives, their preparation and compositions containing them
US6699891B1 (en) * 1999-11-26 2004-03-02 Shionogi & Co., Ltd. Npyy5 antagonists
US6784192B2 (en) * 2000-01-20 2004-08-31 Eisai Co., Ltd. Piperidine compound and pharmaceutical composition thereof
US6806277B2 (en) * 2002-07-23 2004-10-19 Aventis, Pharma S.A. Quinolylpropylpiperidine derivatives, preparation process and intermediates, and compositions including them
US6841562B2 (en) * 2002-09-11 2005-01-11 Aventis Pharma S.A. Quinolylpropylpiperidine derivatives, intermediates and compositions containing them, and preparation therefor
US6911442B1 (en) * 1999-06-21 2005-06-28 Smithkline Beecham P.L.C. Quinoline derivatives as antibacterials
US6939970B2 (en) * 2002-12-20 2005-09-06 Aventis Pharma S. A. Crystalline form of (3R,4R)-4-[3-(S)-hydroxy-3-(6 methoxyquinolin-4-propyl]-1-[2-2-thienylthio)ethyl] piperidine-3-carboxylic acid
US6962917B2 (en) * 2000-07-26 2005-11-08 Smithkline Beecham P.L.C. Aminopiperidine quinolines and their azaisosteric analogues with antibacterical activity
US6989913B2 (en) * 1999-12-24 2006-01-24 Dainippon Screen Mfg. Co., Ltd. Halftone dots, halftone dot forming method and apparatus therefor
US20060040925A1 (en) * 2002-07-25 2006-02-23 Davies David T Aminocyclohexene quinolines and their azaisosteric analogues with antibacterial activity
US20060116512A1 (en) * 2002-12-04 2006-06-01 Axten Jeffrey M Quinolines and nitrogenated derivatives thereof and their use as antibacterial agents
US20060189601A1 (en) * 2003-03-27 2006-08-24 Hennessy Alan J Antibacterial agents
US20060189604A1 (en) * 2002-06-26 2006-08-24 Axten Jeffrey M Compounds
US20060205719A1 (en) * 2003-04-08 2006-09-14 Morphochem Aktiengesellschaft Fur Novel compounds having an antibacterial activity
US7109213B2 (en) * 2002-01-29 2006-09-19 Glaxo Group Limited Aminopiperidine compounds, process for their preparation, and pharmaceutical compositions containing them
US7115634B2 (en) * 1999-12-14 2006-10-03 Societe De Conseils De Recherches Et D'applications Scientifiques 4-aminopiperidine and their use as a medicine
US7141564B2 (en) * 2001-05-25 2006-11-28 Smithkline Beecham P.L.C. Nitrogen-containing bicyclic heterocycles for use as antibacterials
US20070004710A1 (en) * 2002-11-05 2007-01-04 Axten Jeffrey M Antibacterial agents
US7186730B2 (en) * 2001-05-25 2007-03-06 Smithkline Beecham P.L.C. Bicyclic nitrogen-containing heterocyclic derivatives for use as antibacterials
US7205408B2 (en) * 2001-01-22 2007-04-17 Smithkline Beecham, P.L.C. Quinolines and nitrogenated derivative thereof substituted in 4-position by a piperidine-containing moiety and their use as antibacterial agents
US7223776B2 (en) * 2002-10-10 2007-05-29 Morphochem Ag Compounds with anti-bacterial activity
US7232833B2 (en) * 2003-03-28 2007-06-19 Novexel 4-substituted quinoline derivatives, method and intermediates for their preparation and pharmaceutical compositions containing them
US7232832B2 (en) * 2002-11-05 2007-06-19 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Antibacterial agents
US7232834B2 (en) * 2002-09-11 2007-06-19 Novexel Sa Quinolylpropylpiperidine derivatives, intermediates and compositions containing them, and preparation therefor
US7312212B2 (en) * 2002-01-29 2007-12-25 Glaxo Group Limited Aminopiperidine derivatives

Family Cites Families (36)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB1375836A (en) 1971-02-18 1974-11-27
GB8531666D0 (en) * 1985-12-23 1986-02-05 Wyeth John & Brother Ltd Indole derivatives
GB9005014D0 (en) 1990-03-06 1990-05-02 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv N.(4.piperidinyl)(dihydrobenzofuran or dihydro.2h.benzopyran)carboxamide derivatives
US5240943A (en) * 1991-12-19 1993-08-31 G. D. Searle & Co. Benzopyran class iii antiarrhythmic agents
US5595872A (en) 1992-03-06 1997-01-21 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Nucleic acids encoding microsomal trigyceride transfer protein
EP0667867A1 (en) 1992-11-05 1995-08-23 Smithkline Beecham Plc Piperidine derivatives as 5-ht4 receptor antagonists
JPH09501404A (en) 1993-05-26 1997-02-10 スミスクライン・ビーチャム・ラボラトワール・ファルマソーティク New compound
US5739135A (en) 1993-09-03 1998-04-14 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Inhibitors of microsomal triglyceride transfer protein and method
US6077857A (en) 1995-11-13 2000-06-20 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Hemoregulatory compounds
EP0944388A4 (en) 1996-04-03 2001-08-16 Merck & Co Inc FARNESYL PROTEIN TRANSFERASE INHIBITORS
CA2318842A1 (en) 1998-01-26 1999-07-29 Julie Dorothy Warrack Quinoline derivatives as antibacterials
TR200002182T2 (en) 1998-01-27 2000-12-21 Aventis Pharmaceuticals Products Inc. Substituted aksozaherosayklil factor xa inhibitors
GB9822450D0 (en) 1998-10-14 1998-12-09 Smithkline Beecham Plc Medicaments
JP2002535323A (en) 1999-01-20 2002-10-22 スミスクライン・ビーチャム・パブリック・リミテッド・カンパニー Piperidinylquinoline as a protein kinase inhibitor
GB9917408D0 (en) 1999-07-23 1999-09-22 Smithkline Beecham Plc Compounds
GB9917406D0 (en) 1999-07-23 1999-09-22 Smithkline Beecham Plc Compounds
CN1420882A (en) 1999-07-28 2003-05-28 阿温蒂斯药物公司 Substd. oxoazaheterocyclyl compounds
SE9902987D0 (en) 1999-08-24 1999-08-24 Astra Pharma Prod Novel compounds
FR2798656B1 (en) 1999-09-17 2004-12-17 Aventis Pharma Sa DERIVATIVES OF QUINOLYL PROPYL PIPERIDINE, THEIR PREPARATION AND THE COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING THEM
ES2316383T3 (en) 1999-09-17 2009-04-16 Millennium Pharmaceuticals, Inc. RELATED BENZAMIDS AND INHIBITORS OF FACTOR XA.
WO2001064642A2 (en) 2000-02-29 2001-09-07 Cor Therapeutics, Inc. Benzamides and related inhibitors of factor xa
IL151552A0 (en) 2000-03-17 2003-04-10 Bristol Myers Squibb Pharma Co Cyclic beta-amino acid derivatives as inhibitors of matrix metalloproteases and tnf-alpha
WO2001072712A1 (en) 2000-03-24 2001-10-04 Cor Therapeutics, Inc. ISOQUINOLONE INHIBITORS OF FACTOR Xa
GB0011838D0 (en) 2000-05-17 2000-07-05 Astrazeneca Ab Chemical compounds
WO2002024684A1 (en) 2000-09-21 2002-03-28 Smithkline Beecham P.L.C. Quinoline derivatives as antibacterials
US20040102431A1 (en) 2000-09-25 2004-05-27 Christoph Boss Substituted amino-aza-cycloalkanes useful against malaria
FR2815031A1 (en) 2000-10-11 2002-04-12 Gilles Fillion Heterocyclic and carbocyclic compounds have serotoninergic transmission modifying properties for the treatment of central and peripheral nervous disorders
FR2816618B1 (en) 2000-11-15 2002-12-27 Aventis Pharma Sa HETEROCYCLYLALCOYL PIPERIDINE DERIVATIVES, THEIR PREPARATION AND THE COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING THEM
GB0031086D0 (en) 2000-12-20 2001-01-31 Smithkline Beecham Plc Medicaments
GB0031088D0 (en) 2000-12-20 2001-01-31 Smithkline Beecham Plc Medicaments
FR2822154B1 (en) 2001-03-13 2005-10-21 Aventis Pharma Sa QUINOLYL PROPYL PIPERIDINE DERIVATIVES, THEIR PREPARATION AND THE COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING THEM
AU2002304733A1 (en) 2001-04-17 2002-10-28 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd. Amino-aza-cyclohexanes for the treatment of malaria
GB0118238D0 (en) 2001-07-26 2001-09-19 Smithkline Beecham Plc Medicaments
AR042486A1 (en) 2002-12-18 2005-06-22 Glaxo Group Ltd QUINOLINE AND NAFTIRIDINE COMPOSITE HALOSUSTITUDED IN POSITION 3, PROCEDURE TO PREPARE THE COMPOUND, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION THAT INCLUDES IT AND ITS USE TO PREPARE SUCH COMPOSITION.
FR2849034A1 (en) 2002-12-20 2004-06-25 Aventis Pharma Sa New stable, monohydrated crystalline form C of 1-substituted 4-quinolylpropyl-piperidine-3-carboxylic acid derivative, useful as antibacterial agent or intermediate for crystalline form A
FR2852954B1 (en) 2003-03-28 2006-07-14 Aventis Pharma Sa QUINOLINE-4-SUBSTITUTED DERIVATIVES, METHODS AND PREPARATION INTERMEDIATES THEREOF AND PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING THEM

Patent Citations (34)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5610157A (en) * 1989-03-22 1997-03-11 Janssen Pharmaceutica N.V. N-(3-hydroxy-4-piperidinyl) (dihydrobenzofuran, dihydro-2H-benzopyran or dihydrobenzo-dioxin) carboxamide derivatives
US5310743A (en) * 1991-08-12 1994-05-10 Ciba-Geigy Corp. 1-acylpiperidine compounds
US5932590A (en) * 1996-12-05 1999-08-03 Merck & Co., Inc. Inhibitors of farnesyl-protein transferase
US6602882B1 (en) * 1998-10-14 2003-08-05 Smithkline Beecham P.L.C. Quinoline derivatives and their use as antibacterial agents
US6911442B1 (en) * 1999-06-21 2005-06-28 Smithkline Beecham P.L.C. Quinoline derivatives as antibacterials
US6403610B1 (en) * 1999-09-17 2002-06-11 Aventis Pharma S.A. Quinolylpropylpiperidine derivatives, their preparation and the compositions which comprise them
US6699891B1 (en) * 1999-11-26 2004-03-02 Shionogi & Co., Ltd. Npyy5 antagonists
US7115634B2 (en) * 1999-12-14 2006-10-03 Societe De Conseils De Recherches Et D'applications Scientifiques 4-aminopiperidine and their use as a medicine
US6989913B2 (en) * 1999-12-24 2006-01-24 Dainippon Screen Mfg. Co., Ltd. Halftone dots, halftone dot forming method and apparatus therefor
US6323217B2 (en) * 2000-01-13 2001-11-27 Adir Et Compagnie Piperidine-4 sulphonamide compounds
US6784192B2 (en) * 2000-01-20 2004-08-31 Eisai Co., Ltd. Piperidine compound and pharmaceutical composition thereof
US6962917B2 (en) * 2000-07-26 2005-11-08 Smithkline Beecham P.L.C. Aminopiperidine quinolines and their azaisosteric analogues with antibacterical activity
US20060014749A1 (en) * 2000-07-26 2006-01-19 Smithkline Beecham P.L.C. Aminopiperidine quinolines and their azaisosteric analogues with antibacterial activity
US6603005B2 (en) * 2000-11-15 2003-08-05 Aventis Pharma S.A. Heterocyclylalkylpiperidine derivatives, their preparation and compositions containing them
US7205408B2 (en) * 2001-01-22 2007-04-17 Smithkline Beecham, P.L.C. Quinolines and nitrogenated derivative thereof substituted in 4-position by a piperidine-containing moiety and their use as antibacterial agents
US6602884B2 (en) * 2001-03-13 2003-08-05 Aventis Pharma S.A. Quinolylpropylpiperidine derivatives, their preparation, and compositions containing them
US7141564B2 (en) * 2001-05-25 2006-11-28 Smithkline Beecham P.L.C. Nitrogen-containing bicyclic heterocycles for use as antibacterials
US20070135422A1 (en) * 2001-05-25 2007-06-14 Smithkline Beecham P.L.C. Nitrogen-containing bicycle heterocycles for use as antibacterials
US7186730B2 (en) * 2001-05-25 2007-03-06 Smithkline Beecham P.L.C. Bicyclic nitrogen-containing heterocyclic derivatives for use as antibacterials
US7312212B2 (en) * 2002-01-29 2007-12-25 Glaxo Group Limited Aminopiperidine derivatives
US7109213B2 (en) * 2002-01-29 2006-09-19 Glaxo Group Limited Aminopiperidine compounds, process for their preparation, and pharmaceutical compositions containing them
US20060189604A1 (en) * 2002-06-26 2006-08-24 Axten Jeffrey M Compounds
US6806277B2 (en) * 2002-07-23 2004-10-19 Aventis, Pharma S.A. Quinolylpropylpiperidine derivatives, preparation process and intermediates, and compositions including them
US20060040925A1 (en) * 2002-07-25 2006-02-23 Davies David T Aminocyclohexene quinolines and their azaisosteric analogues with antibacterial activity
US6841562B2 (en) * 2002-09-11 2005-01-11 Aventis Pharma S.A. Quinolylpropylpiperidine derivatives, intermediates and compositions containing them, and preparation therefor
US7232834B2 (en) * 2002-09-11 2007-06-19 Novexel Sa Quinolylpropylpiperidine derivatives, intermediates and compositions containing them, and preparation therefor
US7223776B2 (en) * 2002-10-10 2007-05-29 Morphochem Ag Compounds with anti-bacterial activity
US20070004710A1 (en) * 2002-11-05 2007-01-04 Axten Jeffrey M Antibacterial agents
US7232832B2 (en) * 2002-11-05 2007-06-19 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Antibacterial agents
US20060116512A1 (en) * 2002-12-04 2006-06-01 Axten Jeffrey M Quinolines and nitrogenated derivatives thereof and their use as antibacterial agents
US6939970B2 (en) * 2002-12-20 2005-09-06 Aventis Pharma S. A. Crystalline form of (3R,4R)-4-[3-(S)-hydroxy-3-(6 methoxyquinolin-4-propyl]-1-[2-2-thienylthio)ethyl] piperidine-3-carboxylic acid
US20060189601A1 (en) * 2003-03-27 2006-08-24 Hennessy Alan J Antibacterial agents
US7232833B2 (en) * 2003-03-28 2007-06-19 Novexel 4-substituted quinoline derivatives, method and intermediates for their preparation and pharmaceutical compositions containing them
US20060205719A1 (en) * 2003-04-08 2006-09-14 Morphochem Aktiengesellschaft Fur Novel compounds having an antibacterial activity

Cited By (52)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20050159411A1 (en) * 2002-01-29 2005-07-21 Daines Robert A. Aminopiperidine derivatives
US7312212B2 (en) 2002-01-29 2007-12-25 Glaxo Group Limited Aminopiperidine derivatives
US20060189604A1 (en) * 2002-06-26 2006-08-24 Axten Jeffrey M Compounds
US20100081650A1 (en) * 2002-06-26 2010-04-01 Jeffrey Michael Axten Antimicrobial Compounds
US7622481B2 (en) 2002-06-26 2009-11-24 Glaxo Group Limited Antibacterial compounds
US20060166977A1 (en) * 2002-11-05 2006-07-27 Axten Jeffrey M Antibacterial agents
US7232832B2 (en) 2002-11-05 2007-06-19 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Antibacterial agents
US7618959B2 (en) 2002-11-05 2009-11-17 Smithklinebeecham Corp Antibacterial agents
US20060116512A1 (en) * 2002-12-04 2006-06-01 Axten Jeffrey M Quinolines and nitrogenated derivatives thereof and their use as antibacterial agents
US7491714B2 (en) 2002-12-04 2009-02-17 Glaxo Group Limited Quinolines and nitrogenated derivatives thereof and their use as antibacterial agents
US20060041123A1 (en) * 2002-12-18 2006-02-23 Axten Jeffrey M Antibacterial agents
US20070287701A1 (en) * 2004-06-15 2007-12-13 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Antibacterial Agents
US7691850B2 (en) 2004-06-15 2010-04-06 Glaxo Group Limited Antibacterial agents
US20070254872A1 (en) * 2004-07-08 2007-11-01 Glaxo Group Limited Antibacterial Agents
US20090105249A1 (en) * 2004-10-14 2009-04-23 Euro-Celtique S.A. 4-phenylsulfonamidopiperidines as calcium channel blockers
US9000174B2 (en) 2004-10-14 2015-04-07 Purdue Pharma L.P. 4-phenylsulfonamidopiperidines as calcium channel blockers
US7759340B2 (en) 2005-01-25 2010-07-20 Glaxo Group Limited Antibacterial agents
US20080139539A1 (en) * 2005-01-25 2008-06-12 Glaxo Group Limited Antibacterial Agents
US7709472B2 (en) 2005-01-25 2010-05-04 Glaxo Group Limited Antibacterial agents
US7511035B2 (en) 2005-01-25 2009-03-31 Glaxo Group Limited Antibacterial agents
US20080146551A1 (en) * 2005-01-25 2008-06-19 William Henry Miller Antibacterial Agents
US20090181955A1 (en) * 2005-01-25 2009-07-16 William Henry Miller Antibacterial Agents
US7592334B2 (en) 2005-01-25 2009-09-22 Glaxo Group Limited Antibacterial agents
US20080234256A1 (en) * 2005-01-25 2008-09-25 Glaxo Group Limited Antibacterial Agents
US7605169B2 (en) 2005-01-25 2009-10-20 Glaxo Group Limited Antibacterial agents
US20080009483A1 (en) * 2005-01-25 2008-01-10 Glaxo Group Limited Antibacterial Agents
US7648980B2 (en) 2005-01-25 2010-01-19 Glaxo Group Limited Antibacterial agents
US20080139540A1 (en) * 2005-01-25 2008-06-12 Glaxo Group Limited Antibacterial Agents
US20080221110A1 (en) * 2005-10-21 2008-09-11 Nathalie Cailleau Compounds
US20080280892A1 (en) * 2005-10-21 2008-11-13 Nathalie Cailleau Compounds
US7723330B2 (en) 2006-03-07 2010-05-25 Array Biopharma Inc. Heterobicyclic pyrazole compounds and methods of use
US20100256356A1 (en) * 2006-03-07 2010-10-07 Array Biopharma Inc. Heterobicyclic pyrazole compounds and methods of use
US8247442B2 (en) 2006-03-29 2012-08-21 Purdue Pharma L.P. Benzenesulfonamide compounds and their use
US20090239910A1 (en) * 2006-03-29 2009-09-24 Zhengning Chen Benzenesulfonamide Compounds and Their Use
US20090054418A1 (en) * 2006-04-06 2009-02-26 William Henry Miller Antibacterial Agents
US7709496B2 (en) 2006-04-06 2010-05-04 Glaxo Group Limited Antibacterial agents
US20090306136A1 (en) * 2006-04-13 2009-12-10 Akira Matsumura Benzenesulfonamide Compounds and the Use Thereof
US8937181B2 (en) 2006-04-13 2015-01-20 Purdue Pharma L.P. Benzenesulfonamide compounds and the use thereof
US8791264B2 (en) 2006-04-13 2014-07-29 Purdue Pharma L.P. Benzenesulfonamide compounds and their use as blockers of calcium channels
US20100022595A1 (en) * 2006-04-13 2010-01-28 Purdue Pharma L.P. Benzenesulfonamide Compounds and Their Use as Blockers of Calcium Channels
US20100324292A1 (en) * 2006-12-20 2010-12-23 Neelakandha Mani S Synthesis of unsaturated piperidines from piperidones with a silyl reagent
US8013157B2 (en) 2006-12-20 2011-09-06 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Synthesis of unsaturated piperidines from piperidones with a silyl reagent
WO2008079255A1 (en) * 2006-12-20 2008-07-03 Janssen Pharmaceutica N.V. Synthesis of unsaturated piperidines from piperidones with a silyl reagent
US8410150B2 (en) 2007-03-09 2013-04-02 University Health Network Inhibitors of carnitine palmitoyltransferase and treating cancer
US8399486B2 (en) 2007-04-09 2013-03-19 Purdue Pharma L.P. Benzenesulfonyl compounds and the use thereof
US8389524B2 (en) 2007-04-20 2013-03-05 Glaxo Group Limited Tricyclic nitrogen containing compounds as antibacterial agents
US20100137282A1 (en) * 2007-04-20 2010-06-03 David Evan Davies Tricyclic nitrogen containing compounds as antibacterial agents
US20110015174A1 (en) * 2007-08-01 2011-01-20 University Health Network Cyclic inhibitors of carnitine palmitoyltransferase and treating cancer
US8680282B2 (en) 2007-08-01 2014-03-25 University Health Network Cyclic inhibitors of carnitine palmitoyltransferase and treating cancer
US8765736B2 (en) 2007-09-28 2014-07-01 Purdue Pharma L.P. Benzenesulfonamide compounds and the use thereof
US20100311792A1 (en) * 2007-09-28 2010-12-09 Bin Shao Benzenesulfonamide Compounds and the Use Thereof
US8575351B2 (en) 2009-06-04 2013-11-05 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Active metabolite of a thrombin receptor antagonist

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP1583537A3 (en) 2005-12-14
WO2004002490A3 (en) 2005-10-27
TW200409637A (en) 2004-06-16
AR040336A1 (en) 2005-03-30
JP2006505505A (en) 2006-02-16
WO2004002490A2 (en) 2004-01-08
AU2003238054A8 (en) 2004-01-19
EP1583537A2 (en) 2005-10-12
US7498326B2 (en) 2009-03-03
AU2003238054A1 (en) 2004-01-19

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7498326B2 (en) Compounds
JP4522262B2 (en) Compound
US7186730B2 (en) Bicyclic nitrogen-containing heterocyclic derivatives for use as antibacterials
US7312212B2 (en) Aminopiperidine derivatives
US7205408B2 (en) Quinolines and nitrogenated derivative thereof substituted in 4-position by a piperidine-containing moiety and their use as antibacterial agents
US7109213B2 (en) Aminopiperidine compounds, process for their preparation, and pharmaceutical compositions containing them
US7141564B2 (en) Nitrogen-containing bicyclic heterocycles for use as antibacterials
ES2278778T3 (en) AMINOPIPERIDIN QUINOLINAS AND ITS AZAISOSTERIC ANALOGS WITH ANTIBACTERIAL ACTIVITY.
EP1539133B1 (en) Aminocyclohexene quinolines and their azaisosteric analogues with antibacterial activity
US20040198756A1 (en) Medicaments
US20060041123A1 (en) Antibacterial agents
US20040077655A1 (en) Piperazine derivatives for treatment of bacterial infections

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: GLAXO GROUP LIMITED, ENGLAND

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:AXTEN, JEFFREY M.;DAINES, ROBERT A.;DAVIES, DAVID T.;AND OTHERS;REEL/FRAME:016525/0668;SIGNING DATES FROM 20050509 TO 20050512

REMI Maintenance fee reminder mailed
LAPS Lapse for failure to pay maintenance fees
STCH Information on status: patent discontinuation

Free format text: PATENT EXPIRED DUE TO NONPAYMENT OF MAINTENANCE FEES UNDER 37 CFR 1.362

FP Lapsed due to failure to pay maintenance fee

Effective date: 20130303